Ba Smart FF 453.0 DCT Ece 02-15 en GB

>> Owner's Manual
smart forfour
Symbols
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware
actions or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i These symbols indicate useful instruc-
tions or further information that could
be helpful to you.
X This symbol designates an instruc-
tion you must follow.
X Several consecutive symbols indi-
cate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can
page) find further information on a
topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on
play the multifunction display.
Let the fun begin!
Before you first drive off, read this Own-
er's Manual carefully and familiarise
yourself with your vehicle. For your own
safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Apple® iOS
This Owner's Manual provides information
on the most important functions of your
vehicle.
The equipment or model designation of
your vehicle may vary according to:
Rmodel
Rorder Android™
Rcountry variant Please note that the smart guides app may
Ravailability not currently be available in your country.
The illustrations in this manual show a The technical documentation team at
left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand- Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
drive vehicles, the layout of components motoring.
and controls differs accordingly.
smart is constantly updating its vehicles
to the state of the art.
smart therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may there-

fore differ from that shown in the descrip-
tions and illustrations.
The following are integral components of
the vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in

the vehicle at all times. If you sell the
vehicle, always pass the documents on to
the new owner.
You can also use the smart guides app for
tablets and smartphones.
4535849902 É4535849902*ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ............................................ 4 At a glance ................................... 25
Introduction ................................. 18 Safety .......................................... 37
Opening and closing ....................... 67
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ..... 83
Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 91
Climate control ............................ 107
Driving and parking ...................... 119
On-board computer and displays ...... 153
Stowing and features ..................... 203
Maintenance and care .................... 213
Breakdown assistance .................... 227
Wheels and tyres ........................... 247
Technical data ............................. 265

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Priming/deactivating function .... 60

Switching off ............................ 61
12 V socket Ambient lighting
see Sockets Setting the brightness .............. 166
Switching on/off ...................... 166
A Animals
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) see Pets in the vehicle
Display message ....................... 176 Anti-lock Braking System
Function/notes ......................... 62 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes ................ 62 Anti-skid chains
Warning lamp .......................... 193 see Snow chains
Activating/deactivating air- Anti-theft alarm system
recirculation mode ....................... 117 Function .................................. 60
Activating/deactivating cooling Priming/deactivating ................ 60
with air dehumidification .............. 112 Switching off the alarm ............... 61
Adaptive brake lights ..................... 64 Aquaplaning ................................ 144
Additives (engine oil) ................... 271 Ashtray ....................................... 211
Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 94 Authorised workshop
Air conditioning see Qualified specialist workshop
General notes .......................... 108 Automatic engine Start/Stop func-
Air pressure tion
see Tyre pressure Display message ....................... 186
Air vents Automatic engine switch-off (auto-
Important safety notes ............... 117 matic start/stop system) ................. 124
Setting ................................... 117 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 93
Setting the centre air vents ........ 118 Automatic Start/Stop function
Setting the side air vents .......... 118 Indicator lamp (green) .............. 201
Air vents Warning and indicator lamps
see Air vents (yellow) .................................. 201
Air-conditioning system Automatic start/stop system
see Climate control Activating/deactivating ............ 125
Airbag Automatic engine switch-
Enabling and disabling the off ........................................ 124
passenger airbag* ..................... 51 General information ................. 123
Head/thorax airbag .................... 46 Introduction ........................... 123
Introduction ............................ 43 Automatic transmission
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Accelerator pedal position ........ 130
lamps ...................................... 39 Changing gear ......................... 130
Warning lamp ........................... 191 Display message (colour dis-
Airbags play) ...................................... 187
Front airbag (driver, front Display message (monochrome
passenger) ............................... 45 display) ................................. 169
Important safety guidelines ........ 44 Drive program display .............. 129
Kneebag .................................. 45 Drive programs ........................ 131
Triggering .............................. 46 Driving tips ........................... 130
Alarm Emergency running mode ............ 135
Anti-theft alarm system .............. 60 Gearshift paddles .................... 133
Kickdown ................................ 131
Index 5
Malfunction (on-board computer Brake lamps

with colour display) .................. 187 Adaptive ................................. 64
Malfunction (on-board computer Changing bulbs ........................ 100
with monochrome display) .......... 169 Display message (colour dis-
Manual shifting ....................... 131 play) ...................................... 186
Manually releasing the selector Brake lights
lever lock ............................... 135 Display message (monochrome
Overview ................................ 128 display) ................................. 168
Problem (fault) ........................ 135 Brakes
Program selector button ............. 131 ABS ........................................ 62
Pulling away ........................... 122 Brake fluid (notes) ................... 272
Selector lever ......................... 129 Driving tips ........................... 142
Starting the engine .................. 122 Important safety notes ............... 142
Transmission position display ... 129 Parking brake .......................... 139
Transmission positions ............. 130 Warning lamp ........................... 191
Automatic transmission emergency Breakdown
running mode ............................... 135 see Flat tyre
see Towing away/tow-starting
B Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
Battery (key)
Important safety notes ................ 69
C
Replacing ................................ 69
Battery (vehicle) Calling up a fault
Charging ................................ 235 see Display messages
Display message ....................... 179 Capacities (technical data) ............ 268
Important safety notes .............. 233 Car
Jump starting .......................... 236 see Vehicle
Warning and indicator lamps ...... 196 Car key
Belt see Key
see Seat belts Car wash
Belt tensioner see Care
Activation ............................... 46 Car wash (care) ............................. 220
Blower Care
see Climate control Automatic car wash ................... 220
Bonnet (front) Carpets .................................. 225
see Service cover Display .................................. 224
Boot Exhaust pipe ........................... 223
see Tailgate Exterior lighting .................... 223
Brake Gear or selector lever ............... 224
EBD ........................................ 65 General notes .......................... 220
Brake fluid High-pressure cleaner .............. 221
Display message ....................... 175 Interior ................................. 224
Notes ..................................... 272 Paint ..................................... 221
Brake force distribution Plastic trim ............................ 224
see EBD (electronic brake force Reversing camera ..................... 223
distribution) Roof lining ............................. 225
Seat belt ................................ 225
6 Index
Seat cover .............................. 224 Heating .................................. 109

Sensors .................................. 223 Notes on using the air-condi-
Steering wheel ........................ 224 tioning system ......................... 109
Washing by hand ....................... 221 Notes on using the automatic
Wheels ................................... 222 climate control ........................ 111
Windows ................................. 222 Overview of systems .................. 108
Wiper blades ........................... 222 Problem with the rear window
Cargo box heating .................................. 117
Removing (rear seats) ............... 208 Setting the air distribution ....... 113
Central locking Setting the air vents ................. 117
Locking/unlocking (key) ............. 69 Setting the airflow ................... 114
Centre console .............................. 33 Setting the temperature ............. 113
Changing bulbs Switching air-recirculation
Brake lamps ............................ 100 mode on/off ............................. 117
Dipped-beam headlamps ............. 99 Switching on/off ....................... 111
Front foglamp ........................... 99 Switching the rear window heat-
Main-beam headlamps ................ 99 ing on/off ............................... 115
Rear foglamp ........................... 100 Clock
Reversing lamps ...................... 100 Setting (dashboard clock) .......... 156
Tail lamps .............................. 100 Cockpit
Turn signals (front) ................... 98 Overview ................................. 26
Turn signals (rear) ................... 100 Constant headlamp mode
Child seat see Daytime driving lights
Forward-facing restraint sys- Consumption statistics (colour
tem ......................................... 53 display) ...................................... 160
ISOFIX .................................... 49 Controlling speed
On the front-passenger seat ......... 52 see Cruise control
Rearward-facing restraint sys- Coolant
tem ......................................... 53 Battery ................................... 217
Recommendations ...................... 58 Checking the level .................... 218
Suitable positions .................... 54 Drive system ........................... 217
Top Tether ............................... 50 General notes .......................... 272
Child-proof locks Important safety notes ............... 217
Important safety notes ................ 59 Setting the temperature unit ...... 166
Rear doors ............................... 60 Temperature gauge ................... 162
Children Topping up ............................. 218
Restraint systems ...................... 48 Warning lamp ........................... 197
Cigarette lighter .......................... 211 Coolant (engine)
Cleaning Display message ....................... 181
see Care Cooling
Climate control see Climate control
Air conditioning ..................... 109 Copyright ..................................... 23
Automatic air conditioning ........ 111 Cover (front)
Controlling automatically .......... 113 see Service cover
Cooling with air dehumidifica- Crosswind Assist ............................ 65
tion ....................................... 112 Cruise control
Demisting the windows .............. 115 Activating .............................. 145
Demisting the windscreen .......... 114 Buttons .................................. 145
Index 7
Calling up the speed last stored .. 146 Menu (on-board computer with
Cancelling cruise control .......... 146 colour display) ........................ 164
Deactivating ........................... 146 Monochrome ............................ 157
Display message (colour dis- Display (cleaning instructions) ....... 224
play) ...................................... 183 Display message
Display message (monochrome Calling up (message memory) ...... 162
display) ................................. 172 Colour display ......................... 173
Driving systems ....................... 145 Driving systems ....................... 182
Function/notes ........................ 145 General notes (on-board com-
General notes .......................... 145 puter with colour display) .......... 173
Important safety notes ............... 145 General notes (on-board com-
Increasing/decreasing the puter with monochrome display) .. 168
speed ..................................... 146 Monochrome display .................. 168
Storing and maintaining cur- Setting the language ................. 166
rent speed .............................. 145 Display messages
Cup holder Engine ................................... 179
Centre console ......................... 210 Hiding ................................... 173
Important safety notes .............. 209 Lights .................................... 186
Rear centre console .................. 210 Safety systems ......................... 174
Rear compartment ..................... 210 Service display ....................... 218
Cup holder Tyres ..................................... 184
see Cup holder Vehicle .................................. 186
Distance recorder
D Monochrome display .................. 158
Distance recorder
Dashboard
see Trip meter
Additional instruments ............. 156
Distance warning function
Dashboard
Function/notes ......................... 62
see Cockpit
Warning lamp (red) ................... 195
Dashboard clock ........................... 156
Warning lamp (yellow) ............... 194
Data
Door
see Technical data
Automatic locking (switch) .......... 73
Daytime driving lights
Central locking/unlocking (key) ... 69
Function/notes ......................... 93
Control panel ........................... 35
Dealership
Display message ....................... 186
see Qualified specialist workshop
Emergency locking ..................... 74
Declarations of conformity .............. 20
Emergency unlocking .................. 74
Diagnostics connection ................... 20 Important safety notes ................ 72
Digital speedometer Opening (from the inside) ........... 72
Display .................................. 154 Warning lamp .......................... 200
Setting the display ................... 165 Drive program
Dipped-beam headlamps Display .................................. 129
Changing bulbs ......................... 99 Drive programs
Setting for driving abroad Automatic transmission ............. 131
(symmetrical) ........................... 92 Driver's door
Switching on/off ....................... 94 see Door
Display Driver's seat
Colour .................................... 159 see Seats
8 Index
Driving abroad E
smart service .......................... 220
Symmetrical dipped beam ........... 92 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Driving on flooded roads ................ 144 bution)
Driving safety system Display message ....................... 175
EBD (electronic brake force Function/notes ......................... 65
distribution) ........................... 65 Indicator lamp ........................ 192
Driving safety systems eco score
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 62 Display (on-board computer
Adaptive brake lights ................ 64 with colour display) .................. 161
Distance warning function .......... 62 Display (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 157
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Function/notes ........................ 140
gram) ...................................... 64
Electrical fuses
ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
see Fuses
tem) ........................................ 64
Electromagnetic compatibility
Important safety guidelines ........ 61
Declaration of conformity ........... 20
Overview .................................. 61
Electronic Brake-force Distribu-
Driving system
tion
Parking aid ............................. 148
see EBD (electronic brake force
Speed limiter .......................... 147
distribution)
Driving systems
Electronic Traction System
Cruise control ......................... 145
see ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Display message ....................... 182
Emergency release
Lane Keeping Assist .................. 151
Driver's door ............................ 74
Reversing camera ..................... 149
Emergency unlocking
Driving tips
Tailgate .................................. 76
Aquaplaning ........................... 144
Vehicle ................................... 74
Automatic transmission ............. 130
Engine
Brakes ................................... 142
Automatic start/stop system ....... 123
Downhill gradient .................... 142
Display message ....................... 179
Driving abroad ......................... 92
Engine number ......................... 268
Driving in winter ..................... 144
Jump-starting ......................... 236
Driving on flooded roads ........... 144
Running irregularly ................. 126
Driving on wet roads ................. 144
Starting problems .................... 126
Fuel ...................................... 140
Starting the engine with the key .. 122
General .................................. 140
Stopping ................................ 139
Icy road surfaces ..................... 144
Tow-starting (vehicle) .............. 240
Limited braking efficiency on
Warning lamp (engine diagnos-
salted roads ............................ 143
tics) ...................................... 196
New brake pads/linings ............. 143
Engine compartment cover .............. 214
Running-in tips ....................... 120
Engine electronics
Snow chains ............................ 251
Notes ..................................... 266
Subjecting brakes to a load ........ 143
Problem (fault) ........................ 126
Symmetrical dipped beam ........... 92
Engine oil
Wet road surface ...................... 143
Additives ............................... 271
Checking the oil level ............... 214
Display message ....................... 180
Index 9
Filling capacity ...................... 271 Flat tyre

Notes about oil grades ............... 271 Preparing the vehicle ............... 229
Notes on oil level/consumption ... 214 TIREFIT kit ............................. 230
Topping up ............................. 215 Floormat ..................................... 212
Viscosity ............................... 272 Foglamps
Warning lamp ........................... 197 Switching on/off ....................... 94
Engine oil additives Folding top
see Additives (engine oil) Important safety notes ................ 79
Environmental protection Operating ................................ 80
Returning an end-of-life vehi- Problem (malfunction) ................ 81
cle ......................................... 18 Frequencies
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Mobile phone .......................... 266
Characteristics ........................ 64 Two-way radio ......................... 266
Crosswind Assist ....................... 65 Front cover
Display message ....................... 177 see Service cover
ETS ......................................... 64 Front foglamps
Function/notes ......................... 64 Changing bulbs ......................... 99
General notes ........................... 64 Frontal area cover
Important safety guidelines ........ 64 see Service cover
Warning and indicator lamps ...... 193 Fuel
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...... 64 Additives ............................... 270
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Consumption information ........... 270
tions) ......................................... 223 Consumption statistics ............. 160
Exterior lighting Displaying the current con-
Cleaning ................................ 223 sumption (colour display) .......... 162
Settings options ....................... 93 Displaying the current con-
Exterior mirrors sumption (monochrome display) ... 157
Adjusting (electrically) ............. 90 Driving tips ........................... 140
Adjusting (manually) .................. 90 E10 ........................................ 269
Out of position (troubleshoot- Fuel gauge .............................. 155
ing) ........................................ 90 Grade (petrol) ......................... 269
Important safety notes .............. 269
F Problem (malfunction) ............... 138
Refuelling .............................. 136
Fault message Tank content/reserve fuel .......... 269
see Display messages Fuel consumption
Filler cap Displaying (on-board computer
see Fuel filler flap with monochrome display) .......... 158
Fire extinguisher ......................... 229 Resetting data (on-board com-
First-aid kit ............................... 228 puter with monochrome display) .. 158
Fitting a wheel Fuel filler flap
Fitting a wheel ........................ 259 Opening ................................. 137
Lowering the vehicle ................ 259 Fuel level
Preparing the vehicle ............... 256 Gauge .................................... 155
Raising the vehicle .................. 257 Fuel reserve
Removing a wheel ..................... 258 see Fuel
Securing the vehicle against Fuel tank
rolling away ........................... 256 Capacity ................................ 269
10 Index
Problem (malfunction) ............... 138 Ignition lock

Fuses see Key positions
Allocation .............................. 243 Immobiliser ................................. 60
Before changing ....................... 241 Indicator and warning lamp
Dashboard fuse box ................... 242 Restraint system ...................... 191
Fuse box in the front area .......... 241 Indicator and warning lamps
Important safety notes ............... 241 Coolant .................................. 197
Engine diagnostics ................... 196
G Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Gear or selector lever (cleaning
Instrument cluster
instructions) ............................... 224
Overview (colour display) ........... 29
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 18
Overview (monochrome display) .... 27
Glove compartment ........................ 205 Warning and indicator lamps
(colour display) ........................ 30
H Warning and indicator lamps
Handbrake (monochrome display) ................. 28
see Parking brake Instrument cluster lighting
Hands-free system Notes ..................................... 154
see Mobile phone Setting .................................. 164
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 96 Instrument lighting
Head restraints see Instrument cluster lighting
Adjusting (rear) ........................ 87 Interior lighting ........................... 96
Head/thorax airbag ........................ 46 Automatic control system ............ 96
Headlamp flasher ........................... 95 Changing bulbs ........................ 101
Headlamps Overview ................................. 96
Misting up ............................... 96 Reading lamp ............................ 96
see Automatic headlamp mode Setting the ambient lighting ...... 166
Heating Intermittent wipe ......................... 102
see Climate control ISOFIX child seat securing system ..... 49
High-pressure cleaners ................. 221
Hill start assist ........................... 123 J
Hinged windows Jack
Opening/closing ....................... 78 Using .................................... 257
see Side windows Jump start (engine)
see Jump starting (engine)
I Jump starting (engine) ................... 236
Ice warning
Display message (colour dis- K
play) ...................................... 179 Key
Display message (monochrome Changing the battery .................. 69
display) ................................. 173 Door central locking/unlocking .... 69
Warning lamp (colour display) .... 155 Important safety notes ................ 68
Warning lamp (monochrome dis- Loss ........................................ 71
play) ...................................... 155 Positions (ignition lock) ........... 121
Ignition key Problem (malfunction) ................ 71
see Key
Index 11
Starting the engine .................. 122 Deactivating ........................... 148

Key positions (ignition lock) .......... 121 Display message (colour dis-
Kickdown play) ...................................... 182
Driving tips ............................ 131 Display message (monochrome
Manual gearshifting ................. 134 display) .................................. 171
Kneebag ....................................... 45 Exceeding the stored speed ........ 148
General notes .......................... 147
L Increasing/decreasing the
speed ..................................... 148
Lamps Storing the speed ..................... 147
see Warning and indicator lamps Limiting the speed
Lane Keeping Assist see Speed limiter
Activating/deactivating ............ 152 Loading guidelines ....................... 204
Function/information ................ 151 Locking
Warning lamp (colour display) .... 182 see Central locking
Warning lamp (monochrome dis- Locking (doors)
play) ...................................... 171 Automatic ................................ 73
Lane recognition system (auto-
Emergency locking ..................... 74
matic)
From inside (central locking
see Lane Keeping Assist button) .................................... 73
Language (on-board computer) ......... 166 Locking centrally
Lashing eyelets ............................ 208 see Central locking
Licence plate lighting Loudspeaker
Changing ................................ 100 see Subwoofer
Light sensor (display message) ........ 189 Lubricant additives
Lighting see Additives (engine oil)
see Lights Luggage compartment enlargement ... 206
Lights
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 93 M
Dipped-beam headlamps ............. 94
Display message ....................... 186 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ................. 250
Driving abroad ......................... 92 Main-beam headlamps
Foglamps ................................. 94 Changing bulbs ......................... 99
Hazard warning lamps ................. 96 Switching on/off ....................... 95
Headlamp flasher ....................... 95 Manual transmission
Headlamp range ......................... 94 Display message (colour dis-
Light switch ............................. 93 play) ...................................... 187
Main-beam headlamps ................ 95 Display message (monochrome
Rear foglamp ............................ 94 display) ................................. 168
Setting the ambient lighting ...... 166 Engaging reverse gear ............... 128
Side lamps ............................... 94 Gear lever ............................... 127
Turn signals ............................. 95 Malfunction (on-board computer
see Interior lighting with colour display) ................. 189
see Replacing bulbs Malfunction (on-board computer
Limiter with monochrome display) .......... 170
Buttons .................................. 147 Pulling away ........................... 122
Calling up the last speed stored .. 148 Shift recommendation ............... 128
Cancelling .............................. 148 Shifting to neutral ................... 127
12 Index
Starting the engine .................. 122 Operating instructions

Manually releasing the selector Vehicle equipment ..................... 19
lever lock (automatic transmission) . 135 Operating safety
Message memory (colour display) ...... 162 Declaration of conformity ........... 20
Messages Important safety note ................. 19
see Display messages Operating system
Mirrors see On-board computer
see Exterior mirrors Outside temperature display
see Rear-view mirror Ice warning (colour display) ....... 155
Mobile phone Ice warning (monochrome dis-
Frequencies ............................ 266 play) ...................................... 155
Installation ............................ 266 Notes ..................................... 155
Transmission output (maximum) .. 266 Setting the units ...................... 166
Model series Overhead control panel ................... 34
see Vehicle identification plate Overrevving range ......................... 156
Multi-functional seat
see Seats P
Multifunction steering wheel
Paint code ................................... 267
Overview .................................. 31
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .... 221
Panoramic roof
N
Operating roller sunblinds .......... 81
Notes on running in a new vehicle .... 120 Park brake
see Parking brake
O Parking ...................................... 138
Important safety notes ............... 138
Occupant safety
Parking brake .......................... 139
Children in the vehicle .............. 47
Reversing camera ..................... 149
Switching off the engine ............ 139
Pets in the vehicle .................... 60
Parking brake
Oil
Display message ....................... 174
see Engine oil
Notes/function ........................ 139
On-board computer
Warning lamp ........................... 191
Display submenu ...................... 164
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Displaying a service message ..... 219
Disabling/activating ................. 51
Indicator lamps ........................ 39
Menu overview (colour display) ... 160
Passenger airbag
Menu overview (monochrome
Enabling and disabling* ............. 51
display) ................................. 158
Problem (malfunction)* .............. 54
Message memory ....................... 162
Passenger seat
Operating (colour display) ......... 159
Folding down ............................ 86
Operating (monochrome display) .. 156
Petrol ........................................ 269
Selecting the language .............. 166
Pets in the vehicle ......................... 60
Service menu ........................... 162
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
Settings menu .......................... 163
On-board computer* tions) ........................................ 224
Messages menu ......................... 162 Power windows
On-board diagnostics interface see Side windows
see Diagnostics connection Program selector button ................. 131
Index 13
Protection against theft Rear window wiper

Anti-theft alarm system .............. 60 Replacing the wiper blade ......... 103
Immobiliser ............................. 60 Switching on/off ...................... 102
Protection of the environment Rear-compartment seat belt status
General notes ............................ 18 indicator ..................................... 43
Pulling away Rear-view mirror
Automatic transmission ............. 122 Dipping (manual) ....................... 90
General notes .......................... 122 Recycling
Manual transmission ................. 122 see Protection of the environment
Refuelling
Q Fuel gauge .............................. 155
QR code
Refuelling process ................... 136
Rescue card .............................. 22
see Fuel
Qualified specialist workshop .......... 21
Replacing bulbs
R Overview of bulb types ................ 97
Radio-based vehicle components Removing/replacing the cover
Declaration of conformity ........... 20 (front wheel arch) ...................... 98
Rain/light sensor (display message) . 189 Replacing the bulb
Reading lamp ................................ 96 Interior lighting ..................... 101
Readyspace seats .......................... 207 Turn signals ............................. 99
Rear bench seat Rescue card .................................. 22
Folding the backrest forwards/ Reserve (fuel tank)
back ...................................... 206 see Fuel
Rear foglamp Reserve fuel
Changing bulbs ........................ 100 Display message ....................... 181
Switching on/off ....................... 94 Restraint system
Rear lamps Display message ....................... 174
Changing bulbs ........................ 100 Introduction ............................ 38
Rear parking aid Warning lamp ........................... 191
Activating/deactivating ............ 149 Warning lamp (function) .............. 38
Function/notes ........................ 148 Rev counter ................................. 156
Rear seat Reverse gear
Adjusting the angle of the Engaging (manual transmission) .. 128
backrests ............................... 207 Reversing camera
Rear seat Cleaning instructions ............... 223
see Rear bench seat Function/notes ........................ 149
Rear seats Switching on/off ...................... 150
readyspace seats ...................... 207 Reversing feature
Removing cargo box .................. 208 Side windows ............................ 76
Rotating the seat cushions ......... 207 Reversing lamp
Rear shelf ................................... 208 Changing bulbs ........................ 100
Rear window heating Roller sunblinds for panoramic
Problem (fault) ......................... 117 roof
Switching on/off ...................... 115 Operating ................................ 81
Roof
see Panoramic roof
14 Index
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Service message ....................... 218

instructions) ............................... 225 Showing a service message ......... 219
Special service requirements ..... 220
S Service products
Brake fluid ............................. 272
Safety
Coolant (engine) ...................... 272
Child restraint systems .............. 48 Engine oil .............................. 271
Children in the vehicle .............. 47 Fuel ...................................... 269
see Operating safety Important safety notes .............. 268
Safety system
Washer fluid ........................... 273
see Driving safety systems Setting the air distribution ............ 113
Seat
Setting the airflow ........................ 114
Folding passenger seat down ........ 86
Shifting to neutral (manual trans-
Folding the backrest (rear com-
mission) ..................................... 127
partment) forwards/back ............ 206
Side lamps
Seat belt
Switching on/off ....................... 94
Correct usage ........................... 41
Side window
Seat belts
Hinged window .......................... 78
Adjusting the height .................. 42
Side windows
Cleaning ................................ 225
Fastening ................................ 42
Opening/closing ....................... 77
Important safety guidelines ........ 40
Problem (malfunction) ................ 79
Introduction ............................ 40
Resetting ................................. 78
Rear seat belt status indicator .... 43
smart Centre
Releasing ................................ 42
Warning lamp .......................... 190
Snow chains ................................. 251
Warning lamp (function) .............. 43
Sockets
Seat cushions
Centre console ......................... 212
Rotating (rear seats) ................. 207
Seats General notes .......................... 212
Speakers
Adjusting (manually) .................. 86
see Subwoofer
Cleaning the cover ................... 224
Specialist workshop ....................... 21
Correct driver's seat position ..... 84
Speed limiter
Seat heating problem ................. 89 Activating .............................. 147
Switching seat heating on/off ...... 88 Important safety notes ............... 147
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 223 Setting limit speed .................. 147
Speedometer
Service Centre
Digital .................................. 154
In the Instrument cluster ........... 154
Service cover ............................... 216
see Instrument cluster
Service display
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Calling up (on-board computer
tem)
with colour display) ................. 162
see Restraint system
Calling up (on-board computer
Start/stop function
see Automatic start/stop system
Hiding a service message .......... 219
Starting (engine) .......................... 121
Notes ..................................... 218
Starting the engine
Resetting ............................... 219
see Starting (engine)
Index 15
Steering Time
Display message (colour dis- Setting (on-board computer
play) ...................................... 186 with colour display) ................. 163
Warning lamps ......................... 200 Setting (on-board computer
Steering wheel with monochrome display) .......... 158
Adjusting (manually) .................. 89 Setting the time format (on-
Button overview ......................... 31 board computer with colour dis-
Cleaning ................................ 224 play) ..................................... 164
Gearshift paddles .................... 133 TIREFIT kit ................................. 230
Important safety notes ................ 89 Tool
Stowage areas .............................. 204 see Vehicle tool kit
Stowage compartment Top Tether .................................... 50
Door stowage compartment ......... 205 Total distance recorder
Stowage compartments Colour display ......................... 160
Centre console ........................ 205 Monochrome display .................. 157
Cup holder .............................. 209 Setting the display unit ............ 165
Glove compartment ................... 205 Tow-starting
Important safety information ..... 204 Emergency engine starting ........ 240
Rear ...................................... 206 Important safety notes .............. 238
Submenu Towing
Ambient lighting ..................... 166 Important safety notes .............. 238
Subwoofer With the rear axle raised ........... 240
Fitting/removing ..................... 209 Towing away
Summer tyres Fitting the towing eye .............. 239
In winter ................................ 250 Removing the towing eye ............ 240
Sun visor ..................................... 211 With both axles on the ground ..... 240
Transmission
T see Automatic transmission
see Manual transmission
Tailgate
Transmission position display ........ 129
Emergency unlocking .................. 76
Transporting the vehicle ............... 240
Trip computer (colour display) ........ 160
Opening dimensions ................. 273
Trip meter
Opening/closing ....................... 75
Colour display ......................... 160
Warning lamp .......................... 200
Tank Displaying (on-board computer
see Fuel tank
Technical data Displaying (on-board computer
Capacities ............................. 268
Resetting (on-board computer
Information ............................ 266
Tyres/wheels ........................... 260
Resetting (on-board computer
Vehicle data ........................... 273
Temperature with monochrome display) .......... 158
Setting the display unit ............ 165
Coolant .................................. 162
Trip meter
Outside temperature ................. 155
see Trip meter
Setting (climate control) ........... 113
Turn signals
Setting the display units ........... 166
Changing bulbs (front) ................ 98
Changing bulbs (rear) ............... 100
16 Index
Replacing the bulb .................... 99 U

Switching on/off ....................... 95
Turn signals Unlocking
see Turn signals Emergency unlocking .................. 74
Two-way radio From inside the vehicle (central
Frequencies ............................ 266 unlocking button) ...................... 73
Installation ............................ 266
Transmission output (maximum) .. 266 V
Type identification plate Vehicle
see Vehicle identification plate Correct use .............................. 21
Tyre pressure Data acquisition ....................... 22
Display message ....................... 184 Electronic malfunction (display
Important safety notes .............. 253 message) ................................ 189
Not reached (TIREFIT) ................ 231 Electronic malfunction (warn-
Reached (TIREFIT) .................... 231 ing lamp) ............................... 200
Recommended .......................... 251 Electronics ............................. 266
Tyre pressure monitor Equipment ................................ 19
Display message (monochrome Implied warranty ....................... 22
display) .................................. 171 Leaving parked up .................... 140
Function/notes ........................ 253 Locking (in an emergency) ........... 74
General notes .......................... 253 Locking (key) ............................ 69
Important safety notes .............. 253 Lowering ................................ 259
Restarting (on-board computer Pulling away ........................... 122
with colour display) ................. 254 Raising .................................. 257
Restarting (on-board computer Registration ............................ 21
with monochrome display) .......... 254 Securing from rolling away ........ 256
Warning lamp .......................... 198 Tow-starting ........................... 238
Warning message ...................... 254 Towing away ............................ 238
Tyres Transporting .......................... 240
Changing a wheel ..................... 255 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........ 74
Checking ................................ 249 Unlocking (key) ......................... 69
Direction of rotation ................ 256 Vehicle data ........................... 273
Display message ....................... 184 Vehicle battery
General notes .......................... 260 see Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes .............. 248 Vehicle data ................................ 273
M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............ 250 Vehicle dimensions ....................... 273
Replacing ............................... 255 Vehicle emergency locking .............. 74
Service life ............................ 249 Vehicle identification number
Snow chains ............................ 251 see VIN
Storing .................................. 256 Vehicle identification plate .......... 267
Summer tyres in winter ............. 250 Vehicle key
Tyre size (data) ....................... 260 see Key
Tyre tread .............................. 249 Vehicle tool kit ........................... 229
Wheel and tyre combinations ...... 261 Ventilation
see Flat tyre see Climate control
VIN ............................................ 267
Index 17
W Windows
Cleaning ................................ 222
Warning and indicator lamps see Side windows
ABS ....................................... 193 Windscreen
Airbag ................................... 191 Demisting ............................... 114
Automatic Start/Stop function Windscreen
(green) ................................... 201 see Windscreen
Automatic Start/Stop function Windscreen washer fluid
(yellow) .................................. 201 see Windscreen washer system
Battery .................................. 196 Windscreen washer system
Brakes .................................... 191 Important safety notes .............. 273
Distance warning function (red) .. 195 Topping up ............................. 218
Distance warning function (yel- Windscreen wipers
low) ....................................... 194 Intermittent wipe .................... 102
Door ...................................... 200 Problem (malfunction) ............... 105
EBD ....................................... 192 Rear window wiper .................... 102
Electronics ............................ 200 Replacing the wiper blades ........ 102
ESP® ...................................... 193 Switching on/off ...................... 101
Lane Keeping Assist (colour Winter driving
display) ................................. 182 General notes .......................... 250
Lane Keeping Assist (mono- Winter operation
chrome display) ....................... 171 Slippery road surfaces .............. 144
Oil pressure ............................ 197 Snow chains ............................ 251
Overview (colour display) ........... 30 Winter tyres
Overview (monochrome display) .... 28 M+S tyres ............................... 250
Parking brake .......................... 191 Wiper blades
PASSENGER AIR BAG .................... 39 Cleaning ................................ 222
Seat belt ................................ 190 Important safety notes ............... 102
Steering ................................ 200 Replacing (on the rear window) ... 103
Tyre pressure monitor ............... 198 Replacing (windscreen) ............. 103
Warning triangle .......................... 228 Workshop
Wheel and tyre combinations see Qualified specialist workshop
see Tyres
Wheel bolt tightening torque .......... 259
Wheels
Changing a wheel ..................... 255
Changing/replacing ................. 255
Checking ................................ 249
Cleaning ................................ 222
Fitting a new wheel .................. 259
Fitting a wheel ........................ 256
General notes .......................... 260
Important safety notes .............. 248
Removing a wheel ..................... 258
Snow chains ............................ 251
Storing .................................. 256
Tightening torque .................... 259
Wheel size/tyre size ................. 260
18 >> Introduction.
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine
General notes speed.
H Environmental note Rswitch off the engine in stationary traf-
Daimler's declared policy is one of com- fic.

prehensive environmental protection. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-
The objective is to use the natural resour- sumption.

ces which form the basis of our existence on
this planet sparingly and in a manner which
takes the requirements of both nature and Returning an end-of-life vehicle
humanity into account.
EU countries only:
You too can help to protect the environment
smart will take back your old vehicle to
by operating your vehicle in an environ-
dispose of it in an environmentally-
mentally-responsible manner.
responsible manner in accordance with the
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend Directive.
on the following factors:
There is a network of return points and
Rthe operating conditions of your vehicle disassembly plants available. In these
Ryour personal driving style plants you can return your vehicle free of
You can influence both factors. You should charge. This makes a valuable contribution
bear the following in mind: to the recycling process and the conserva-
tion of resources.
Operating conditions:
For further information on recycling old
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel vehicles, recovery and the terms of the pol-
consumption. icy, visit the smart homepage.
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are
always correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Genuine smart parts
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con-
tribute to environmental protection. You H Environmental note
should therefore adhere to the service Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
intervals. assemblies and parts which are of the same
Ralways have service work carried out at a quality as new parts. For these, the same
qualified specialist workshop. warranty applies as for new parts.
Personal driving style:
! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal well as control units and sensors for
when starting the engine. these restraint systems, may be installed
Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehi- in the following areas of your vehicle:
cle stationary. Rdoors
Rdrive carefully and maintain a suitable
Rdoor pillars
distance from the vehicle in front.
Rdoor sills
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
Rseats
braking.
Rdashboard
>> Introduction. 19
Rinstrument cluster Always specify the vehicle identification

Rcentre console number (VIN) (Y page 267) when ordering
Do not install accessories such as audio genuine smart parts.
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint Owner's Manual
systems. Vehicle equipment
Have accessories retrofitted at a quali-
This Owner's Manual describes all models
fied specialist workshop.
and all standard and optional equipment
You could jeopardise the operating safety available for your vehicle at the time of
of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and publication of the Owner's Manual. Coun-
wheels as well as accessories relevant to try-specific differences are possible.
safety which have not been approved by Note that your vehicle may not be fitted
smart. This could lead to malfunctions in with all features described. This is also
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake the case for systems and functions relevant
system. Use only genuine smart parts or to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your
parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, vehicle may differ from that in the
wheels and accessories that have been spe- descriptions and illustrations.
cifically approved for your vehicle. The original purchase contract documen-
smart tests genuine parts and conversion tation for your vehicle contains a list of
parts and accessories that have been spe- all of the systems in your vehicle.
cifically approved for your vehicle for Should you have any questions concerning
their reliability, safety and suitability. equipment and operation, please consult a
Despite ongoing market research, smart is smart Centre.
unable to assess other parts. smart there-
The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are
fore accepts no responsibility for the use
important documents and should kept in the
of such parts in smart vehicles, even if they
vehicle.
have been officially approved or inde-
pendently approved by a testing centre.
In Germany, certain parts are only offi- Operating safety
cially approved for installation or modi-
fication if they comply with legal require- Important safety notes
ments. This also applies to some other
countries. All genuine smart parts meet the G WARNING
approval requirements. The use of non- If you do not have the prescribed service/
approved parts may invalidate the vehi- maintenance work or necessary repairs
cle's general operating permit. carried out, this could result in malfunc-
This is the case: tions or system failures. There is a risk of
an accident.
Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type
Always have the prescribed service/main-
from that for which the vehicle's general
tenance work as well as necessary repairs
operating permit was granted
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
Rif other road users could be endangered
shop.
Rif the emission or noise levels are
adversely affected
Z
20 >> Introduction.
G WARNING If the underbody panelling is damaged,

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or combustible materials such as leaves,
twigs may ignite if they come into contact grass or twigs can gather between the
with hot parts of the exhaust system. There underbody and the underbody panelling.
is a risk of fire. If these materials come in contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system, they can
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
catch fire.
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other In such situations, have the vehicle
flammable materials which have become checked and repaired immediately at a
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon
qualified specialist workshop. continuing your journey, you notice that
driving safety is impaired, pull over and
G WARNING stop the vehicle immediately, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
Modifications to electronic components,
In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
their software as well as wiring could
cialist workshop.
affect their function and/or the operation
of other networked components. This could
in particular also be the case for systems
Declarations of conformity
relevant to safety. They might not function
properly anymore and/or jeopardise the Wireless vehicle components
operational safety of the vehicle. There is
an increased risk of an accident and injury. The following information applies to all
components of the vehicle and the infor-
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well
mation systems and communication devices
as electronic components or their software.
integrated into the vehicle which receive
Always have work on electrical and elec-
and/or transmit radio waves:
tronic components carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. The components of this vehicle that receive
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- with the essential requirements and all
tronics, the general operating permit is other relevant conditions of Directive
rendered invalid. 1999/5/EC. For further information enquire
at any smart centre.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle
if: Electromagnetic compatibility
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a
The electromagnetic compatibility of the
high kerb or an unpaved road
vehicle components has been checked and
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.
certified according to the currently valid
a kerb or a pothole in the road version of Regulation ECE-R 10.
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the Diagnostics connection
underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres
The diagnostics connection is only inten-
could be damaged without the damage
ded for the connection of diagnostic
being visible. Components damaged in
equipment at a qualified specialist work-
this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the
shop.
case of an accident, no longer withstand
the strain they are designed for.
>> Introduction. 21
G WARNING Rrepair work

If you connect equipment to a diagnostics Rmodifications, installations and con-
connection in the vehicle, it can affect the versions
operation of the vehicle systems. This may Rwork on electronic components
affect the operating safety of the vehicle. smart recommends that you use a smart
There is a risk of an accident. centre.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
tics connection in the vehicle.
Vehicle registration
G WARNING
smart may ask its smart centres to carry out
Objects in the driver's footwell may technical inspections on certain vehicles.
restrict the clearance around the pedals or The quality or safety of the vehicle is
block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises improved as a result of the inspection.
the operating and road safety of the vehi-
smart can only inform you about vehicle
cle. There is a risk of an accident.
checks if it has your registration data.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet
that they do not get into the driver's foot-
been registered in your name in the fol-
well. Always fit the floormats securely and
lowing cases:
as prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an
not use loose floormats and do not place authorised specialist dealer.
several floormats on top of one another. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined
at a smart centre.
! If the engine is switched off and equip- It is advisable to register your vehicle
ment on the diagnostics connection is with a smart centre.
used, the starter battery may discharge.
Inform smart as soon as possible about any
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics change in address or vehicle ownership.
connection can lead to emissions monitor- You can do this at a smart centre, for exam-
ing information being reset, for example. ple.
This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet
the requirements of the next emissions test
during the main inspection. Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
Qualified specialist workshop others could fail to recognise certain dan-
gers. Leave warning stickers in position.
A qualified specialist workshop has the Observe the following information when
necessary special skills, tools and quali- driving your vehicle:
fications to correctly carry out any neces-
Rthe safety notes in this manual
sary work on your vehicle. This particu-
larly applies to work relevant to safety. Rthe technical data in this manual
Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Rtraffic rules and regulations
Always have the following work carried out Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
at a qualified specialist workshop: motor vehicles
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Z
22 >> Introduction.
Implied warranty These include, for example:

RThe operating status of system compo-
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehi- nents, e.g. fluid levels
cle as well as about possible vehicle RStatus messages concerning the vehicle
damage. Damage to your vehicle that ari- and its individual components, e.g. num-
ses from culpable contraventions ber of wheel revolutions/speed, decel-
against these instructions is not cov- eration in movement, lateral accelera-
ered either by the smart implied war- tion, accelerator pedal position
ranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- RMalfunctions and defects in key system
ranty. components, including, for instance,
lights, brakes.
RVehicle reactions and operating condi-
QR codes for rescue card tions in special driving situations,
including, for instance, deployment of
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler an airbag, use of stability control sys-
flap and on the opposite side on the B-pil- tems.
lar. In the event of an accident, rescue REnvironmental conditions, including,
services can use the QR code to quickly find for instance, the outside temperature.
the appropriate rescue card for your vehi-
cle. The current rescue card contains, in a This data is of an exclusively technical
compact form, the most important informa- nature and can be used to:
tion about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of Rassist in the detection and elimination
the electric cables. of faults and defects
You can find more information under Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an
http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/ accident
public/content/asportal/en/ Roptimise vehicle functions
communication/informationen_fuer/ The data cannot be used to trace the vehi-
QRCode.html. cle's movements.
If you have the vehicle serviced, this tech-
nical information can be read out from the
Data stored in the vehicle
event and fault data memory.
A large number of your vehicle's electronic Services include, for example, informa-
components can store data. tion on:
The data memory temporarily or perma- Rrepair work
nently stores technical information about: Rservice work
Rthe vehicle's operating state Rwarranty claims
Revents Rquality assurance
Rfaults The readout is handled by service network

The technical information generally docu- staff (including the manufacturer) with the
ments the condition of a component, mod- help of special diagnostic testers. You can
ule, system or the environment. obtain more detailed information, if
required.
After the fault has been rectified, the
information is cleared in the fault memory
or is sequentially overwritten.
>> Introduction. 23
During vehicle operation, certain situa-

tions may arise in which this technical
data - in conjunction with other informa-
tion and, if applicable, after consultation
with an approved assessor - may be linked
to an individual person.
Examples of this include:
Raccident reports
Rvehicledamage
Revidence
Copyright information
General notes
You can find information on licences for
free and open-source software used in your
vehicle and its electronic components on
the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
24
25
Cockpit ........................................... 26
Instrument cluster with monochrome
display ........................................... 27
>> At a glance.
Instrument cluster with colour dis-
play ............................................... 29
Multifunction steering wheel .............. 31
Centre console .................................. 33
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Door control panel ............................. 35
26 Cockpit
Cockpit
>> At a glance.
Function Page Function Page

: Additional instruments E Ignition lock 121
on the dashboard 156
F Adjusts the steering
; Instrument cluster 29 wheel 89
= Horn G Control panel for:
? Multifunction lever è Turning the auto-
matic start/stop system
On-board computer 156
on/off 125
Windscreen wipers com-
Turning Lane Keeping
bination switch 101
Assist on/off 151
A Locks/unlocks the vehicle Turning the forward col-
centrally 73 lision warning on/off 62
Switches the hazard warn- Turning the parking aid
ing lamps on/off 96 on/off 148
B Overhead control panel 34 Headlamp range adjust-
ment 94
C smart Audio-System/
smart Media-System (see H Lights combination
the separate operating switch 93
instructions) I Gearshift paddles 133
D Climate control system
control panel 108
Instrument cluster with monochrome display 27
Instrument cluster with monochrome display

Displays
>> At a glance.
i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function Page
: Speedometer 154
; Monochrome display 157
= Warning and indicator
lamps 28
28 Instrument cluster with monochrome display
Warning and indicator lamps

>> At a glance.

: ^ Distance warning I \ Doors or the tailgate 200
function 194 Vehicle electronics 200
; · Distance warning J R Rear foglamp 94
signal 195
K L Dipped-beam head-
= T Side lamps 94 lamps 94
? ç Automatic start/stop L K Main-beam head-
function lamps 95
Conditions for the auto-
matic engine switch-off
M N Foglamps 94
not met 123 N # Turn signal, left 95
Malfunction 201
O ü Seat belts 190
A ? Coolant temperature 197
P 6 Restraint system 191
B 5 Oil pressure 197
Q ! ABS 193
C í Battery 196
R h Tyre pressure moni-
D ! Turn signal, right 95 tor 198
E D Power steering 200 S è Automatic start/stop
function
F ; Engine diagnostics 196
Automatic start/stop
G J Brakes 191 function 124
H ÷ esp® 193
Instrument cluster with colour display 29
Instrument cluster with colour display

Displays
>> At a glance.
i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function Page
: Speedometer 154
; Colour display 159
= Warning and indicator
lamps 30
30 Instrument cluster with colour display
Warning and indicator lamps

>> At a glance.

: ç Automatic start/stop G ! Turn signal, right 95
function
H # Turn signal, left 95
Conditions for the auto-
matic engine switch-off I J Brakes 191
not met 123
J R Rear foglamp 94
Malfunction 201
K N Foglamps 94
; è Automatic start/stop
function L K Main-beam head-
Automatic start/stop lamps 95
function 124
M L Dipped-beam head-
= ! ABS 193 lamps 94
? ÷ esp® 193 N 6 Restraint system 38
A í Battery 196 O T Side lamps 94
B h Tyre pressure moni- P · Distance warning
tor 198 signal 195
C 5 Oil pressure 197 Q ü Seat belts 190
D D Power steering 200 R \ Doors or the tailgate 200
Vehicle electronics 200
E ; Engine diagnostics 196
F ? Coolant temperature 197
Multifunction steering wheel 31
Multifunction steering wheel
>> At a glance.
: Colour display in instru- ? Cruise control and lim-
ment cluster 29 iter button:
Monochrome display in ® Increases or stores
instrument cluster 27 the current speed
; smart Audio-System or − Decreases current speed
smart Media-System dis- • Cruise control 145
play (see the separate • Limiter
operating instructions)
A Cruise control and lim-
= W X Changes the iter button:
volume of the smart ° Calls up the last
Audio-System/smart speed stored
Media-System (see the
• Cruise control 145
separate operating
instructions) • Limiter
Only with an instrument B Cruise control and lim-
cluster with colour dis- iter button:
play: ± Interrupts cruise
? Switches voice- control or the limiter
operated control of the • Cruise control 145
smart Audio-System • Limiter
on/off and accepts/ends a
call (see the separate
operating instructions)
32 Multifunction steering wheel

C Cruise control and lim- D Only with an instrument
>> At a glance.
iter switch: cluster with colour dis-

V Activates cruise play:
control 9 : Scrolls through
^ Deactivates cruise a menu or list 159
control or the limiter a
È Activates limiter Confirms a selection 159
• Cruise control 145 Changes to the "Reset val-
• Limiter ues" function in certain
menus 159
Hides display messages 173
i Voice-operated control as well as con-

trol of the telephone and volume using
the steering wheel buttons in the control
panel on the right = only function with
the smart Media-System. If you use a
smart Audio-System or an audio device
from another manufacturer, the functions
may be restricted or not available at all.
Centre console 33
Centre console
>> At a glance.
: Cup holders 209 C AUX/USB port and SD mem-
ory card (only with smart
; Drawer 205 Media-System)
= Opens/closes the folding D Cup holders 210
top 80
Coin holder E Transmission position
display 130
? Selector lever 129
F Sets the driving program
A Parking brake 139 (program selector button) 131
B Cigarette lighter (vehi- G Ashtray (vehicles with
cles with smoker's pack- smoker's package) 211
age) 211
Power socket 212
34 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

>> At a glance.

: Switches the left-hand = Switches the right-hand
reading lamp on/off 96 reading lamp on/off 96
; Depending on the position ? PASSENGER AIRBAG
of the switch: OFF/ON indicator lamps 39
Interior lighting Rear seat belt status
switched on 96 indicator 43
Automatic interior light- A Rear-view mirror 90
ing control on 96
Interior lighting
switched off 96
Door control panel 35
Door control panel
>> At a glance.
: Opens the door 72 = W Opens/closes the
side windows 76
; Adjusts the exterior mir-
rors electrically 90
36
37
Useful information ............................ 38

Occupant safety ................................ 38
Children in the vehicle ...................... 47
Child-proof locks ............................. 59
Pets in the vehicle ............................ 60
>> Safety.
Protection against theft ..................... 60
Driving safety systems ....................... 61
38 Occupant safety
Useful information An airbag supplements a correctly worn

seat belt. The airbag, as an additional
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- safety device, increases protection for
els, series and optional equipment for vehicle occupants in applicable accident
your vehicle that were available at the situations. The airbags are not deployed,
for example, in the event of an accident in
>> Safety.
time of going to press. Country-specific

differences are possible. Note that your which sufficient protection is offered by
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- the seat belt. In addition, only those air-
tures described. This is also the case for bags, which in the applicable accident
systems and functions relevant to safety. situations offer additional protection,
are deployed in the event of an accident.
i Read the information on qualified spe- However, the seat belt and airbag generally
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). do not protect against objects penetrating
the vehicle from the outside.
Information on how the restraint system
Occupant safety
operates can be found under "Deployment of
Introduction to the restraint system belt tensioners and airbags" (Y page 46).
See "Children in the vehicle" for further
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
information on children travelling in the
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
vehicle as well as on child restraint sys-
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event
tems (Y page 47).
of an accident. The restraint system can
also reduce the forces to which vehicle
occupants are subjected during an acci-
Important safety notes
dent.
The restraint system includes the: G WARNING
RSeat belt system If the restraint system is modified, it may
RAirbags no longer work as intended. The restraint
system may then not perform its intended
RChild restraint system
protective function by failing in an acci-
RChild seat securing system dent or triggering unexpectedly, for exam-
The components of the restraint system ple. There is an increased risk of injury,
work in conjunction with each other. They possibly even fatal.
can only offer protection if all vehicle Never modify parts of the restraint system.
occupants always: Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well
Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened as electronic components or their software.
(Y page 41)
Rhave the seat adjusted properly
If it is necessary to modify an airbag sys-
tem to accommodate a person with disabil-
(Y page 85)
ities, contact a smart centre.
As the driver, you must also make sure that
the steering wheel is also adjusted prop-
erly. Observe the information on the cor- Restraint system warning lamp
rect driver's seat position (Y page 84).
In addition, you must make sure that the The functions of the restraint system are
airbags can inflate properly if they are checked after the ignition is switched on
deployed (Y page 44). and at regular intervals while the engine
Occupant safety 39
is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be lamp ; are part of the deactivation system
detected in good time. of the front-passenger front airbag.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in The indicator lamps display the status of
the instrument cluster lights up when the the front-passenger front airbag.
ignition is switched on. It goes out no later RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the
>> Safety.
than a few seconds after the engine is star- front-passenger front airbag is disa-
ted. The components of the restraint system bled. It will then not be deployed in the
are in operational readiness. event of an accident.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the
restraint system warning lamp: front-passenger front airbag is ena-
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is bled. If, in the case of an accident, all
switched on deployment criteria are met, the front-
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with passenger front airbag is deployed.
the engine running Depending on the person in the front-
Rlights up again while the engine is run- passenger seat, the front-passenger front
ning airbag must either be disabled or enabled.
You must make sure of this both before and
G WARNING during a journey.
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
RChildren in a child restraint system:
restraint system components may be trig-
whether the front-passenger front air-
gered unintentionally or might not be trig-
bag must be enabled or disabled depends
gered at all in the event of an accident with
on the installed child restraint system,
a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This
and the age and size of the child. There-
can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for
fore, always observe the information on
example. There is an increased risk of
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 47).
serious or even fatal injuries.
There you will also find instructions on
Have the restraint system checked and backwards and forwards-facing child
repaired immediately at a qualified spe- restraint systems on the front-passenger
cialist workshop. seat.
RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be off and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
must be on. The front-passenger front
airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR-
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-
passenger front airbag is disabled. It
will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident. In this case, the front-
passenger seat should not be used.
Be sure to observe the notes on "Activat-
ing/deactivating the front-passenger
airbag" as well as "Seat belts"
(Y page 51) (Y page 40) and "Airbags"
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : (Y page 43). There you can also find
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator information on the correct seat posi-
tion.
Z
40 Occupant safety
Observe the information on the airbag wise, the belt tensioner could be trig-
deactivation system of the front-passenger gered in the event of an accident and
front airbag (Y page 51). would have to be replaced.

Seat belts
>> Safety.
G WARNING
Introduction The seat belt cannot perform its intended
A correctly worn seat belt is the most effec- protective function if it is not fastened
tive means of restraining the movement of correctly. Also, an improperly fastened
vehicle occupants in the event of a colli- seat belt can cause additional injuries in
sion or if the vehicle overturns. This the event of an accident, sudden braking or
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants com- abrupt changes of direction. There is an
ing into contact with parts of the vehicle increased risk of injury, possibly even
interior or being ejected from it. The seat fatal.
belt also helps to keep the vehicle occu- Always make sure that all vehicle occupants
pants in the best position in relation to the are wearing their seat belt properly and
airbag being deployed. are seated correctly.
The seat belt system consists of:
Rseat
G WARNING
belts
The seat belt does not offer the intended
Rbelt tensioners and belt force limiters
level of protection if you have not moved
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply the backrest to an almost vertical position.
by the seat belt guide, the inertia reel When braking or in the event of an accident,
locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out you could slide underneath the seat belt and
any further. sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for
The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in example. This poses an increased risk of
the event of a collision so that it fits injury or even fatal injury.
tightly across your body. However, it does Adjust the seat properly before beginning
not pull the vehicle occupants back in the your journey. Always ensure that the back-
direction of the seat backrest. rest is in an almost vertical position and
The belt tensioner does not, however, cor- that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is
rect an incorrect seat position or correct routed across the centre of your shoulder.
the routing of a seat belt that is worn
incorrectly. G WARNING
When triggered, seat belt force limiters Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts correctly without a suitable,
seat belt on the vehicle occupant. additional restraint system. The seat belt
The belt force limiters are synchronised cannot perform its intended protective
with the front airbags, which take on a part function if it is not fastened correctly.
of the deceleration force. This can reduce Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can
the forces to which the vehicle occupants cause additional injuries in the event of an
are subjected during an accident. accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes
of direction. There is an increased risk of
! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, injury, possibly even fatal.
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a
buckle on the co-driver's seat. Other-
suitable restraint system.
Occupant safety 41
If a child under twelve years of age and less Correct use of the seat belt
than 1.50 m tall is travelling in the vehicle:
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
Ralways secure the child in a child (Y page 40).
restraint system suitable for this smart All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
vehicle. seat belt correctly before beginning the
>> Safety.
The child restraint system must be journey. Also make sure that all vehicle
appropriate to the age, weight and size occupants are always wearing the seat belt
of the child. correctly while the vehicle is in motion.
Ralways observe the instructions and When fastening the seat belt, always make
safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" sure that:
in this Owner's Manual (Y page 47) in Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to
addition to the child restraint system
the belt buckle belonging to that seat.
manufacturer's installation instruc-
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
tions.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a win-
G WARNING ter coat.
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Rthey are damaged, have been modified, Only then can forces which occur be dis-
are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed tributed across the surface of the seat
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or belt.
extremely dirty Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
Rmodifications have been made to the belt routed across the centre of your shoul-
tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia der.
reels The shoulder section of the seat belt
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage should not touch your neck nor be routed
in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. under your arm. If possible, adjust the
Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or seat belt to the appropriate height.
fail, for example in the event of an acci- Rthe lap belt passes across your lap as
dent. Modified seat belt tensioners may be tightly and as low down as possible.
deployed unintentionally or fail to be The lap belt must always be routed across
deployed when required. There is an your hip joints and never across your
increased risk of injury, possibly even abdomen. This applies particularly to
fatal. pregnant women. If necessary, press the
Never modify safety belts, seat belt ten- lap belt down into your hip joints and
sioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia pull tight with the shoulder section of
reels. Ensure that seat belts are not dam- the belt.
aged or worn and are clean. After an acci- Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
dent, have the seat belts checked immedi- pointed or fragile objects.
ately at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you have such items located on or in
smart recommends that you only use seat your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or specta-
belts which have been approved specifi- cles, store these in a suitable place.
cally for your vehicle by smart. Any such Ronly one person is using a seat belt.
modifications could invalidate the vehi- Infants and children must never travel
cle's general operating permit. sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant.
In the event of an accident, they could be
Z
42 Occupant safety
crushed between the vehicle occupant

and seat belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt
if the seat belt is also being used by one
of the vehicle's occupants.
>> Safety.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and

restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing
objects, luggage or loads (Y page 204).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts

The shoulder section of the seat belt must
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt always be routed across the centre of the
(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if neces-
seat belts (Y page 41). sary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet up by the
ring.
The belt outlet will engage in various
positions.
X To lower: hold belt guide release ? and
slide the belt outlet down by the ring.
Releasing the seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully
rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or
belt tongue will be trapped in the door or
in the seat mechanism. This could dam-
age the door, the door trim panel and the
seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no lon-
ger fulfil their protective function and
X Adjust the seat (Y page 84). must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
The seat backrest must be in an almost cialist workshop.
vertical position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt out-
let = and engage belt tongue ; into
belt buckle :.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoul-
der section of the seat belt to tighten the
belt across your body.
Occupant safety 43
With the status indicator for the rear-com-

partment seat belts you can determine
which rear seat belt is not fastened.
Seat belt warning lamp : and rear seat
belt status indicator ; and = light up
>> Safety.
when the ignition is switched on. When you
drive off and have reached a speed of
approximately 10 km/h the lamps go out
after approximately 30 seconds. When a
door is opened, the lamps light up again.
Rear seat belt status indicator ; and =
inform you about the status of the seat
belts. They always light up simultaneously,
the status is indicated by the colour.
RRed: seat belt not fastened.
X Press release button :, hold belt RGreen: seat belt fastened.
tongue ; and guide it back towards belt Indicator ; shows the status of the left
outlet =. rear seat, for example.
Seat belt warning lamp : and rear seat
Belt warning for the driver and front belt status indicator ; and = light up
passenger when:
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the Ryou drive off and do not exceed a speed of
instrument cluster is a reminder that all approximately 20 km/h

vehicle occupants must wear their seat and
belts. It may light up continuously or flash. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten
In addition, a warning tone may sound. their seat belts while the vehicle is in
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out motion.
and the warning tone ceases when the driver If you drive off and a rear seat belt is
and the front passenger have fastened their unfastened after the vehicle exceeds a
seat belt. speed of about 20 km/h:
Rseat belt warning lamp : flashes
Rear seat belt status indicator
Rrear seat belt status indicator ; and/or
= lights up red
Ra tone sounds
A rear seat does not have to be occupied.
Airbags
Introduction
The installation location of an airbag is
identified by the AIRBAG symbol.
An airbag supplements a correctly worn
seat belt. It is not a replacement for the
Z
44 Occupant safety
seat belt. The airbag offers additional RAlways lean against the backrest while
protection in applicable accident situa- driving. Do not lean forwards or lean
tions. against the door or side window. You may
Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- otherwise be in the deployment area of
dent. The different airbag systems work the airbags.
>> Safety.
independently of each other (Y page 46). RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in
However, no system available today can front of the seat. Do not put your feet on
completely eliminate injuries and fatali- the dashboard, for example. Your feet
ties. may otherwise be in the deployment area
It is also not possible to completely rule of the airbag.
out a risk of injury caused by an airbag due RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m
to the speed at which the airbag must be tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to
deployed. this height, the seat belt cannot be worn
correctly.
Important safety notes If a child is travelling in your vehicle,
also observe the following notes:
G WARNING
RAlways secure children under twelve
If you deviate from the correct seat posi- years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in
tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten- suitable child restraint systems.
ded protective function and can even cause
RChild restraint systems should be fitted
additional injuries when deployed. There
is an increased risk of serious or even fatal
to the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child to the front-
injuries.
In order to avoid such risks, always ensure
passenger seat when the front-passenger
that all vehicle occupants:
front airbag is disabled, and only then in
a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ- tem. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
ing pregnant women cator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
Rare seated correctly and maintain the passenger front airbag is disabled
furthest possible distance from the air- (Y page 39).
bags RAlways observe the instructions and
Robserve the following notes safety notes on "Children in the vehicle"
Always ensure that there are no objects (Y page 47) and on the "Child restraint
located between the airbag and the vehicle system on the front-passenger seat"
occupant. (Y page 52) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's instal-
RAdjust the seats properly before begin- lation instructions.
ning your journey. Always make sure that
the seat is in an almost upright position.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger
seats as far back as possible. The driv-
er's seat position must allow the vehicle
to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-
side. This allows the airbag to be fully
deployed.
Occupant safety 45
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- Front airbags

vent the airbag from functioning cor-
rectly. Before starting your journey and to
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the
airbag as it deploys, make sure that:
>> Safety.
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an
airbag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, the
door and the door pillar (B-pillar).
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are
hanging on the grab handles or coat
hooks. Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
steering wheel. Front-passenger front air-
attached to the vehicle within the bag ; deploys in front of and above the
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to glove compartment.
doors or side windows. When deployed, the front airbags offer
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects additional head and thorax protection for
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store the occupants in the front seats.
such objects in a suitable place. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you
G WARNING about the status of the front-passenger
If you modify an airbag cover or affix front airbag (Y page 39).
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag
can no longer function correctly. There is Driver's kneebag
an increased risk of injury.
Never modify an airbag cover or affix
objects to it.
G WARNING
Sensors to control the airbags are located
in the doors. Modifications or work not
performed correctly to the doors or door
panelling, as well as damaged doors, can
lead to the function of the sensors being
impaired. The airbags might therefore not
function properly any more. Consequently, Driver's kneebag : deploys under the
the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu- steering column. The driver's kneebag is
pants as they are designed to do. This poses triggered together with the front airbags.
an increased risk of injury.
The driver's kneebag offers additional
Never modify the doors or parts of the thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the
doors. Always have work on the doors or door occupant in the driver's seat.
panelling carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Z
46 Occupant safety
Head/thorax airbags protective function. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal
G WARNING
injury.
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tension-
vent the deployment of the airbags inte-
ers which have been triggered immediately
grated into the seats. Consequently, the
>> Safety.
replaced at a qualified specialist work-

airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants
shop.
as they are designed to do. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal smart recommends that you have the vehicle
injury. towed to a qualified specialist workshop
You should only use seat covers that have after an accident. Take this into account,
been approved for the corresponding seats particularly if a seat belt tensioner was
by smart. triggered or an airbag was deployed.
If the belt tensioners are triggered or an
airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. The 6 restraint system warn-
ing lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. In general, the powder released is
not hazardous to health but may cause
short-term breathing difficulties to per-
sons suffering from asthma or other pul-
monary conditions. Provided it is safe to
Head/thorax airbags : deploy next to the do so, you should leave the vehicle imme-
outer bolster of the seat backrest. diately or open the window in order to pre-
vent breathing difficulties.
When deployed, the head/thorax airbag
offers additional head and thorax protec-
tion. However, it does not protect the arms. Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates
Deployment of belt tensioners and air- important physical data relating to vehi-
bags cle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
Important safety notes Rduration
Rdirection
G WARNING Rintensity
After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
are hot. There is a risk of injury.
restraint system control unit triggers the
Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a seat belt tensioners in the event of a head-
deployed airbag replaced at a qualified on or rear collision.
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNING
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
been deployed are no longer operational
and are unable to perform their intended
Children in the vehicle 47
A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered the case if only parts which are relatively
if: easily deformed are affected and the rate
Rthe ignition is switched on of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an
airbag may be deployed even though the
Rthe components of the restraint system
vehicle suffers only minor deformation.
are operational; see "Restraint system
This is the case if, for example, very rigid
>> Safety.
warning lamp" (Y page 38)
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body
Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt
members are hit, and sufficient decelera-
buckle of the respective front seat tion occurs as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects If the restraint system control unit detects
a high severity of an accident, in certain a side impact, the applicable components
head-on collisions, additional compo- of the restraint system are activated inde-
nents of the restraint system are deployed pendently of each other depending on the
independently of each other: apparent type of accident.
Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag The head/thorax airbag will deploy on the
The front-passenger front airbag can only side on which an impact occurs, independ-
be deployed in an accident if the ent from the seat belt tensioner and seat
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is belt usage
off. Observe the information on the i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp dent. The different airbag systems work
(Y page 39). independently of each other.
The activation threshold for the seat belt How the airbag system works is deter-
tensioners and airbags is determined mined by the severity of the accident
based on the evaluation of the vehicle's detected, especially the vehicle decel-
rate of deceleration or acceleration at eration or acceleration, and the appa-
various points in the vehicle. This process rent type of accident:
is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/
Rhead-on collision
deployment process should take place in
good time at the start of the collision. Rside impact
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration and the direction of the force are
essentially determined by: Children in the vehicle
Rthe distribution of forces during the Important safety notes
collision
Accident statistics show that children
Rthe collision angle
secured on the rear seats are safer than
Rthe deformation characteristics of the children secured on the front seats. For
vehicle this reason, smart strongly advises that you
Rthe characteristics of the object with install a child restraint system on a rear
which the vehicle has collided seat.
Factors which can only be seen and meas- If a child younger than 12 years old and
ured after a collision has occurred do not under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the
play a decisive role in the deployment of an vehicle:
airbag, nor do they provide an indication Ralways secure the child in a child
of airbag deployment. restraint system suitable for smart
The vehicle may be deformed significantly vehicles. The child restraint system
without an airbag being deployed. This is
Z
48 Children in the vehicle
must be appropriate to the age, weight Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
and size of the child have their seat belts fastened correctly
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and and are sitting properly. Particular atten-
safety notes in this section in addition tion must be paid to children.
to the child restraint system manufac- Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
>> Safety.
turer's installation instructions (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 41).
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle Child restraint system
in motion if, for example, they:
Observe the instructions for correct use of
Rrelease the parking brake the child restraint system (Y page 54).
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
For safety reasons, smart recommends that
park position P or shift manual trans- you only use a child restraint system rec-
mission into neutral ommended by smart (Y page 58).
Rstart the engine
G WARNING
In addition, they may operate vehicle
equipment and become trapped. There is a If the child restraint system is incorrectly
risk of an accident and injury. fitted on the seat position suitable for this
purpose, it cannot perform its intended
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
protective function. In the event of an
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
accident, sharp braking or a sudden change
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
in direction, the child may not be held
securely. There is an increased risk of
G WARNING
serious or even fatal injuries.
If persons (particularly children) are
Observe the manufacturer's installation
exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged
instructions and the correct use for the
period, there is a risk of serious or even
child restraint system. Make sure that the
fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-
entire surface of the child restraint system
ticularly children) unattended in the vehi-
is resting on the seat surface. Never place
cle.
objects under or behind the child restraint
system, e.g. cushions. Only use child
G WARNING
restraint systems with the original cover
If the child restraint system is placed in designed for them. Only replace damaged
direct sunlight, the parts could become covers with genuine covers.
very hot. Children could be suffer burns by
touching these parts, in particular on the G WARNING
metallic parts of the child restraint sys-
If the child restraint system is fitted
tem. There is a risk of injury.
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
If you and your child leave the vehicle, loose in the event of an accident, heavy
always make sure that the child restraint braking or a sudden change in direction.
system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it The child restraint system could be thrown
with a blanket, for example. If the child about, striking vehicle occupants. There is
restraint system has been exposed to direct an increased risk of injury, possibly even
sunlight, leave it to cool down before fatal.
securing the child in it. Never leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle.
Always fit child restraint systems prop- ISOFIX child seat securing system
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint G WARNING
system manufacturer's installation ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer
instructions. sufficient protective effect for children
whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are
>> Safety.
You will find further information on stow- secured using the safety belt integrated in
ing objects, luggage or loads under "Load- the child restraint system. The child could,
ing guidelines" (Y page 204). for example, not be restrained correctly in
the event of an accident. This poses an
G WARNING increased risk of injury or even fatal
Child restraint systems or their securing injury.
systems that have been damaged or subjec-
If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use
ted to a load in an accident cannot perform
ISOFIX child restraint systems with which
their intended protective function. In the
the child is also secured with the vehicle
event of an accident, sharp braking or a
seat belt. Also secure the child restraint
sudden change in direction, the child may
system with the Top Tether belt, if availa-
not be held securely. There is an increased
ble.
risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
Immediately replace child restraint sys- When fitting a child restraint system, be
tems that have been damaged or subjected to sure to observe the manufacturer's instal-
a load in an accident. Have the child lation instructions and the instructions
restraint securing systems checked in a for correct use of the child restraint sys-
qualified specialist workshop before fit- tem (Y page 54).
ting a child restraint system again. Before every trip, make sure that the ISO-
FIX child restraint system is engaged cor-
Securing systems for child restraint sys-
rectly in both ISOFIX securing rings.
tems include:
Rthe seat belt system
Rthe ISOFIX securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a

child on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the information on
"Child restraint systems on the front-
passenger seat" (Y page 52). There you
will also find information on disabling
the front-passenger front airbag. : ISOFIX securing rings
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system
interior and on the child restraint system. on both ISOFIX securing rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system
for specially designed child restraint
systems on the rear seats. ISOFIX securing
rings : for two ISOFIX child restraint
systems are fitted on the left and right of
the rear seats.
Z
Secure child restraint systems without an Top Tether anchorages

ISOFIX child seat securing system using
the seat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a
child restraint system, be sure to observe
the manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions and the instructions for
>> Safety.
correct use of the child restraint system

(Y page 54).
Top Tether
Introduction
: Top Tether anchorage
Top Tether provides an additional connec-
tion between the child restraint system
secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It
helps reduce the risk of injury even fur-
ther. If the child restraint system is fitted
with a Top Tether belt, this should always
be used.

G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, : Top Tether anchorage
they could fold forwards in the event of an ; Top Tether hook
accident, heavy braking or sudden changes
= Top Tether belt
of direction. As a result, child restraint
systems cannot perform their intended pro- Top tether anchorage : is fitted behind
tective function. Rear seat backrests that each rear seat to the luggage compartment
are not locked can also cause additional floor.
injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system
This poses an increased risk of injury or with Top Tether. Always comply with the
even fatal injury. child restraint system manufacturer's
Always lock rear seat backrests after fit- installation instructions when doing so.
ting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock
X Move the head restraint upwards.
verification indicator. Adjust the rear
X Route Top Tether belt = under the head
seat backrests so that they are in an upright
position. restraint between the two head restraint
bars.
X Guide Top Tether belt = between the
rear seat backrest and parcel shelf into
the luggage compartment.
Remove the parcel shelf (Y page 208) if
necessary.
X Hook Top Tether hook ; of Top Tether
belt = into Top Tether anchorage :.
Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. G WARNING

Ensure that: If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat
RTop Tether hook ; is hooked into Top in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
Tether anchorage : as shown. tem and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indica-
RTop Tether belt = is not twisted.
tor lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag
>> Safety.
could be deployed in the event of an acci-
RTop Tether belt = is routed between
dent. The child could be struck by the air-
the rear seat backrest and the parcel bag. There is an increased risk of injury,
shelf if the parcel shelf is fitted. possibly even fatal.
X Tension Top Tether belt =. Always com-
In this case, always ensure that the co-
ply with the child restraint system man- driver's airbag is disabled. The
ufacturer's installation instructions PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must
when doing so. light up.
X Move the head restraint back down again
slightly if necessary. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Make sure that you do not interfere with lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR
the correct routing of Top Tether belt =. BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a
rearward-facing child restraint system to
the front-passenger seat. For more infor-
Disabling/activating the front- mation, see "Problems with automatic
passenger front airbag front-passenger airbag deactivation"
(Y page 54).
G WARNING
G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
If you secure a child in a forward-facing
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air-
child restraint system on the front-
bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in
passenger seat and you position the front-
the event of an accident and cannot perform
passenger seat too close to the dashboard,
its intended protective function. A person
in the event of an accident, the child could:
in the front-passenger seat could then, for
example, come into contact with the vehi- Rcome into contact with the vehicle's
cle's interior, especially if the person is interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
sitting too close to the dashboard. This indicator lamp is lit, for example
poses an increased risk of injury or even Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
fatal injury. AIR BAG ON is lit up
In this case the front-passenger seat may This poses an increased risk of injury or
not be used. You may only transport a child even fatal injury.
on the front-passenger seat if they are Move the front-passenger seat as far back
seated in a suitable rearward or forward- as possible. Always make sure that the
facing child restraint system. Always shoulder belt strap is correctly routed
observe the information about suitable from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder
positioning of the child restraint system belt guide on the child restraint system.
in this Owner's Manual as well as the child The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
restraint system manufacturer's installa- wards and downwards from the vehicle belt
tion instructions. outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
outlet and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the informa-
tion in this Owner's Manual on suitable
Z
positioning of the child restraint system lights up and stays on when the ignition
in addition to the child restraint system is switched on (Y page 39).
manufacturer's installation instructions. X To activate the front-passenger front
airbag: turn airbag-off switch : clock-
wise.
>> Safety.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indica-

tor lamp on the overhead control panel
lights up and stays on when the ignition
is switched on (Y page 39).
The passenger airbag is enabled when the
ignition is switched on unless the
passenger airbag has been manually disa-
bled. If the passenger airbag is deactiva-
ted and the ignition is switched on, the
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator
restraint system lamp in the overhead control panel
If you use a rearward-facing child (Y page 39) lights up permanently.
restraint system on the front-passenger
seat, you must disable the front-passenger
front airbag. Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than
children secured in the front-passenger
seat. For this reason, smart strongly advi-
ses that you install a child restraint sys-
tem on a rear seat.
If you secure a child in a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat, always
The airbag-off switch for manually acti- observe the information on "Disabling the
vating and disabling the front-passenger front-passenger front airbag" (Y page 51).
front airbag is in the dashboard on the You can thus avoid the risks that could
front-passenger side. arise as a result of:
X Push in airbag-off switch : beyond the Rthe enabling or disabling of the front-
point of resistance. passenger front airbag by mistake
X To disable the front-passenger front Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
airbag: turn airbag-off switch : anti- restraint system, e.g. too close to the
clockwise. dashboard
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indi-
cator lamp on the overhead control panel
If it is absolutely necessary that you

secure a child in a rearward-facing child
seat, always make sure that the front-
passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
>> Safety.
is permanently lit (Y page 39) is the front-
passenger front airbag disabled.
Always observe the information on suitable
positioning of the child restraint system
(Y page 54) in addition to the child
Please observe the warning notice on the restraint system manufacturer's installa-
front-passenger sun visor, see the illus- tion and operating instructions.
tration.
G WARNING Forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a child restraint If it is absolutely necessary to fit a
system on the front-passenger seat and the forward-facing child restraint system to
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is the front-passenger seat, always move the
off, the front-passenger front airbag can front-passenger seat as far back as possi-
deploy in the event of an accident. The ble. Always make sure that the shoulder belt
child could be struck by the airbag. This strap is correctly routed from the front-
poses an increased risk of injury or even passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder
fatal injury. belt guide on the child restraint system.
Make sure that the front-passenger front The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER wards and downwards from the front-
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. passenger seat belt guide. If necessary,
adjust the front-passenger seat accord-
NEVER use a rearward facing child ingly.
restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child

restraint system
Z
Problems with automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The front-passenger airbag has been disabled manually
BAG OFF 4 indica- (Y page 51).
>> Safety.
tor lamp on the over- X Nobody may use the front-passenger seat unless a suitable
head control panel is rearward-facing child restraint system is being used.
lit.
The front-passenger airbag has not been disabled manually
(Y page 51). The airbag deactivation is malfunctioning.
X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The PASSENGER AIR The passenger airbag has been manually activated (Y page 51).
BAG OFF × indica- The system operates correctly.
tor lamp on the over- X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
head control panel is front-passenger seat.
lit.
The PASSENGER AIR The airbag system is malfunctioning.
BAG ON × indica- X Nobody may use the front-passenger seat.
tor lamp does not light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
up if the passenger
airbag on the over-
head control panel was
activated manually.
Suitable positioning of the child

restraint system
Introduction
Only child restraint systems which are
approved in accordance with the ECE stand-
ard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the
vehicle.
For certain child restraint systems in
weight categories II or III, this can mean
that the area of use is restricted. The max- Example: approval label on the child restraint
imum size setting of the child restraint system
system is not possible due to possible con- "Universal" category child restraint sys-
tact with the roof. tems can be used on the seats indicated
"Universal" category child restraint sys- with U, UF or IUF according to the tables
tems can be recognised by their orange "Suitability of the seats for attaching
approval label and the text "Universal". belt-secured child restraint systems" or
"Suitability of the seats for attaching an

ISOFIX child restraint system".
Semi-universal child restraint systems
are indicated by the text "Semi-universal"
on the approval label. These can be used if
>> Safety.
the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list. For more information,
contact the child restraint system manu-
facturer or visit their website.
Before installing a forward-facing child
restraint system with integrated backrest
on the rear seat, remove the corresponding
head restraint.
Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat – if it is absolutely neces-
sary to fit a child restraint system to the
front-passenger seat:
X Always pay attention to the instructions
under "Child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat" (Y page 52).
There you will find instructions on how
to correctly route the shoulder belt strap
from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoul-
der belt guide on the child restraint sys-
tem (Y page 53).
X Move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible.
X Move the backrest to an almost vertical
position.
The base of the child restraint system
must lie fully against the seat cushion of
the front-passenger seat. The back of a
forward-facing child restraint system
must lie as flat as possible against the
front-passenger backrest. The child
restraint system must not touch the roof
or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the backrest angle
accordingly. Also observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
Z
Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

If you are using a baby car seat of weight category 0 or 0+, or a Group I rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat, the driver's or front-passenger seat must be adjus-
ted in such a way that it does not come into contact with the child restraint system.
In addition, always observe the information given under "Child restraint system"
>> Safety.
(Y page 48), as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
Legend for the table:
X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for
use in this weight category.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal"
category and are approved for use in this weight category.
L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the table of "Recommended
child restraint systems" (Y page 58). Suitable for semi-universal child-restraint
systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manu-
facturer's vehicle model list.
Front-passenger seat
Weight categories Front-passenger front air- Front-passenger front air-

bag is activated bag is deactivated1
Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L
Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L
Rear seats
Weight categories Left, right

Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, L
Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L
1 The front-passenger front airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must
be on.
Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

If you are using a baby car seat of weight category 0 or 0+, or a Group I rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat, the driver's or front-passenger seat must be adjus-
ted in such a way that it does not come into contact with the child restraint system.
In addition, always observe the information given under "Child restraint system"
>> Safety.
(Y page 48), as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
Legend for the table:
X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this
weight category and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the
"universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table
of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 58).
The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For
this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manu-
facturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system
manufacturer or visit their website.
Weight category Size category Equipment Left/right
rear seat
Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0 up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately 6 months
0+ up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately 15 months D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 X
I 9 kg up to 18 kg D ISO/R2 IL
between approximately C ISO/R3 X
9 months and 4 years
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
Z
Recommended child restraint systems

General notes
Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 52) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 54).
>> Safety.
You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any
smart centre.
The smart forfour does not have automatic child seat recognition.
X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, disable
the front-passenger airbag (Y page 51).
Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt
Weight category Manufac- Type Approval number Order number

turer (E1 ...) (A 000 ...)2
Category 0: Britax Römer BABY SAFE 03 301146 970 10 00
up to 10 kg PLUS 04 301146
up to approx- BABY SAFE 04 301146 970 20 00
imately 6 months plus II
Category 0+: Britax Römer BABY SAFE 03 301146 970 10 00
up to 13 kg PLUS 04 301146
up to approx- BABY SAFE 04 301146 970 20 00
imately 15 months plus II
Category I: Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 970 16 00
9 kg up to 18 kg 04 301133
between approx-
imately 9 months
and 4 years
Category II/III: Britax Römer KIDFIX3 04 301198 970 19 00
15 kg up to 36 kg
from approx-
imately 4 years to
12 years
2 Colour code 9H95

3 Before fitting the KIDFIX child restraint system in the vehicle, always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions. These also contain information on the different
installation methods possible.
Child-proof locks 59
Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems for the "Universal"/"Semi-Universal"

category
Weight cate- Size cate- Manufac- Type Approval Order num-

gory gory turer number ber2
(E1 ...)
>> Safety.
Category 0+: E Britax BABY SAFE 03 301146 B6 6 86 8224
up to 13 kg Römer plus 04 301146
Category I: B1 Britax DUO PLUS 03 301133 A 000 970 16
9 kg up to Römer 04 301133 00
18 kg
Child-proof locks G WARNING

vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
G WARNING in motion if, for example, they:
If children are travelling in the vehicle, Rrelease the parking brake
they could: Rshift the manual transmission into neu-
Ropen doors, thus endangering other peo- tral
ple or road users Rstart the engine
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncom- In addition, they may operate vehicle
ing traffic equipment and become trapped. There is a
Roperate vehicle equipment and become risk of an accident and injury.
trapped, for example When leaving the vehicle, always take the
There is a risk of an accident and injury. key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Always activate the child-proof locks and leave children unattended in the vehicle.
override feature if children are travelling
in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, G WARNING
always take the key with you and lock the If persons (particularly children) are
vehicle. Never leave children unattended exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged
in the vehicle. period, there is a risk of serious or even
fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-
Child-proof locks for the rear doors ticularly children) unattended in the vehi-
(Y page 60). cle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is placed in
direct sunlight, the parts could become
very hot. Children could be suffer burns by
touching these parts, in particular on the
metallic parts of the child restraint sys-
tem. There is a risk of injury.
2 Colour code 9H95
Z
60 Protection against theft
If you and your child leave the vehicle, They could:

always make sure that the child restraint Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it trapped, for example
with a blanket, for example. If the child
Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus
restraint system has been exposed to direct
endangering other road users
>> Safety.
sunlight, leave it to cool down before

securing the child in it. Never leave chil- In the event of an accident, sudden braking
dren unattended in the vehicle. or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured
animals could be flung around the vehicle,
injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
Never leave animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always secure animals correctly
during a journey, e.g. in an animal trans-
port box.
Protection against theft

Immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle
from being started without the correct key.
You secure each door individually with the X To activate: remove the key from the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door ignition lock.
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
key with you and lock the vehicle. The
from the outside.
engine can be started by anyone with a
X To activate: press the child-proof lock valid key that is left inside the vehicle.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
when you start the engine.
working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :. Anti-theft alarm system
Activating
Pets in the vehicle X Make sure that:
Rthe side windows are closed.
G WARNING Rno objects, such as mascots, are hang-
If you leave animals unsupervised or unse- ing from the rear-view mirror or grab
cured in the vehicle, they may push a button handles.
or a switch, for example. This will prevent false alarms.
X Make sure that:
Driving safety systems 61
Rthedoors are closed. The alarm is not switched off, even if you
Rthetailgate is closed close the open door that has triggered it,
Rthe service cover is closed. for example.
X Press the & button on the key.
The alarm system is primed after approx- Driving safety systems
>> Safety.
imately 30 seconds.
i If the service cover is open or is not Driving safety systems overview
properly closed, the vehicle will be In this section, you will find information
locked. The anti-theft alarm system is about the following driving safety systems:
primed. To remind you that the service
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
cover is not secured, a warning tone
sounds for 30 seconds. Ensure that the (Y page 62)
service cover is properly closed. Only RDistance warning function (Y page 62)
then is the anti-theft alarm system cor- RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 64)
rectly primed and the service cover Resp® (Electronic Stability Program)
properly secured. (Y page 64)
REBD (electronic brake force distribu-
Deactivating
tion) (Y page 65)
X Press the % button on the key.
or
X Unlock the vehicle by using the key in the
emergency lock. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if
and you are inattentive, the driving safety sys-
Switch the ignition on. tems can neither reduce the risk of acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Driv-
ing safety systems are merely aids
Examples for triggering the alarm
designed to assist driving. You are
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if responsible for the distance to the vehicle
the alarm system is primed and you open: in front, for vehicle speed and for braking
Rthe vehicle by using the key in the emer- in good time. Always adapt your driving
gency lock style to suit the prevailing road, weather
and traffic conditions and maintain a safe
Ra door
distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
Rthe tailgate
carefully.
Rthe service cover
The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there
Switching off the alarm is adequate contact between the tyres and
X To switch off the alarm: press the % the road surface. Please pay special atten-
button on the key. tion to the notes on tyres, recommended
The alarm is switched off. minimum tyre tread depths, etc.
(Y page 248).
or
In wintry driving conditions, always use
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary,
The alarm is switched off.
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ing safety systems described in this sec-
tion work as effectively as possible.
Z
62 Driving safety systems
For safety reasons, smart recommends that Braking

you only use snow chains that have been X If abs intervenes: continue to depress
specially approved for your vehicle by
the brake pedal with force until the
smart, or fine-link snow chains that are of
braking situation is over.
a corresponding standard of quality. For
X To make a full brake application:
more information, please contact a quali-
>> Safety.
fied specialist workshop. depress the brake pedal with full force.
If abs intervenes when braking, you will
feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) The pulsating brake pedal can be an indi-
General notes cation of hazardous road conditions, and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
abs regulates brake pressure in such a way while driving.
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking. Distance warning function
The ! abs warning lamp in the instru-
General notes
ment cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out when the engine is The distance warning function can help you
running. to minimise the risk of a collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
Important safety notes an accident. If the distance warning func-
tion detects that there is a risk of a col-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" lision, you will be warned visually and
section for driving safety systems acoustically.
(Y page 61).
Starting the engine also switches on the
When abs is malfunctioning, other systems, distance warning function.
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the informa- Important safety notes
tion on the abs warning lamp (Y page 191)
and display messages which may be shown G WARNING
in the instrument cluster (Y page 176). The distance warning function does not
G WARNING react:
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when Rto people or animals
braking. The steerability and braking Rto oncoming vehicles
characteristics may be severely impaired. Rto crossing traffic
Additionally, further driving safety sys- Rwhen cornering
tems are deactivated. There is an increased
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
danger of skidding and accidents.
provide a warning in all critical situa-
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- tions. There is a risk of an accident.
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
abs works from a speed of about 6 km/h, situation and be ready to brake.
regardless of road-surface conditions. abs
works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.
G WARNING Function
The distance warning function cannot
always clearly identify objects and com-
plex traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning func-
>> Safety.
tion may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation; do not rely on the distance warn-
ing function alone. X To switch off: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up.
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X To switch on: press button ;.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).
Indicator lamp : goes out.
In particular, the detection of obstacles
can be impaired if there is: The distance warning function issues a
warning at speeds:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cov-
Rof around 30 km/h or more, if, over sev-
ering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
eral seconds, the distance maintained to
the vehicle travelling in front is insuf-
Rinterference by other radar sources
ficient. The · distance warning lamp
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflec-
then lights up in the instrument cluster.
tions, for example, in multi-storey car Rof around 7 km/h or more, if you rapidly
parks approach a vehicle in front. An inter-
Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g.
mittent warning tone will then sound and
a motorcycle the · distance warning lamp will
Ra vehicle travelling in front on a dif- light up in the instrument cluster.
ferent line X Brake immediately in order to increase
Rnew vehicles or after a service on the the distance from the vehicle in front.
distance warning system or
Please observe the information in the X Take evasive action provided it is safe
section on running-in the vehicle to do so.
(Y page 120).
Due to the nature of the system, particu-
Following damage to the front end of the
larly complicated but non-critical driv-
vehicle, have the configuration and oper-
ing conditions may also cause the system to
ation of the radar sensor checked at a
display a warning.
qualified specialist workshop. This also
applies to collisions at slow speeds where With the help of the radar sensor system,
there is no visible damage to the front of the distance warning function can detect
the vehicle. obstacles that are in the path of your vehi-
cle for an extended period of time.
Up to a speed of around 70 km/h, the dis-
tance warning function can also react to
stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
parked vehicles.
Z
64 Driving safety systems
Adaptive brake lamps ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if

they spin. This enables you to pull away and
The adaptive brake lights warn following accelerate on slippery surfaces, for exam-
traffic in an emergency braking situation: ple if the road surface is slippery on one
Rby flashing brake lamps side. In addition, more drive torque is
transferred to the wheel with traction.
>> Safety.
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated

If you brake sharply from a speed of more
than 50 km/h the brake lamps flash rapidly. Important safety notes
In this way, traffic travelling behind you G WARNING
is warned in an even more noticeable man-
ner. If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other
If you brake sharply from a speed of more
driving safety systems are switched off.
than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard
This increases the risk of skidding and an
warning lamps are activated automati-
accident.
cally. If the brakes are applied again, the
brake lamps light up continuously. The Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
hazard warning lamps switch off automat- qualified specialist workshop.
ically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You
can also switch off the hazard warning ! If you test the parking brake using a
lamps using the hazard warning button brake dynamometer, switch the ignition
(Y page 96). off. Application of the brakes by ESP®
may otherwise destroy the brake system.
Observe the notes on esp® when towing away
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) your vehicle with the rear axle raised
(Y page 240).
General notes
If the ÷ esp® warning lamp lights up
i Observe the "Important safety notes" permanently, esp® or hill start assist are
section (Y page 61). unavailable due to a malfunction.
esp® monitors driving stability and trac- Observe the information on warning lamps
tion, i.e. power transmission between the (Y page 193) and display messages which
tyres and the road surface. may be shown in the instrument cluster
If esp® detects that the vehicle is deviat- (Y page 177).
ing from the direction desired by the i Only use wheels with the recommended
driver, one or more wheels are braked to tyre sizes. Only then will esp® function
stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is properly.
also modified to keep the vehicle on the
desired course within physical limits.
Characteristics of ESP®
esp® assists the driver when pulling away
on wet or slippery roads. esp® can also sta- General notes
bilise the vehicle during braking. If the ÷ esp® warning lamp goes out
before the journey begins, esp® is auto-
ETS (Electronic Traction System) matically active.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" If esp® intervenes, the ÷ esp® warning
section (Y page 61). lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
ETS traction control is part of esp®.
If esp® intervenes: increases the risk of skidding and an acci-

X When pulling away, only depress the dent.
accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. You should therefore adapt your driving
X Adapt your driving style to suit the pre- style to the different handling character-
vailing road and weather conditions. istics. Have the brake system checked at a
>> Safety.
qualified specialist workshop.
crosswind assist Observe information regarding indicator
and warning lamps (Y page 193) as well as
General notes
display messages (Y page 175).
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the
roadholding of your vehicle when driving
straight ahead. The crosswind driving
assistance function integrated in esp®
noticeably reduces these impairments.
Depending on the direction and intensity
of the side wind, esp® is activated auto-
matically.
esp® intervenes with stabilising braking
to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the
lane.
crosswind assist is active at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h when driving straight
ahead or cornering gently.
crosswind assist does not work if esp® is
disabled because of a malfunction.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-

tion)
General notes
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability while braking.

i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 61).
G WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels
can lock, e.g. under full braking. This
Z
66
67

Key ................................................ 68
Doors .............................................. 72
Luggage compartment ......................... 75
Side windows .................................... 76
Folding top ...................................... 79
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
>> Opening and closing.

panoramic roof ................................. 81
68 Key
Useful information cause the engine to be switched off. There

is a risk of an accident.
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
els, series and optional equipment for the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before
your vehicle that were available at the inserting the key into the ignition lock.
differences are possible. Note that your ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- fields. Otherwise, the remote control
tures described. This is also the case for function could be affected.
systems and functions relevant to safety. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
i Read the information on qualified spe- vicinity of powerful electrical instal-
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). lations.
Do not keep the key:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
Key phone or another key
Important safety notes Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
film
G WARNING Rwith metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
If children are left unsupervised in the
Only for England:
vehicle, they could:
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other G WARNING
persons or road users When the double locks are activated, the
Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There
trapped, for example
is a risk of injury.
In addition, the children could also set the
Therefore, do not leave any people unsu-
vehicle in motion, for example, if they:
pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil-
Rrelease the parking brake dren, elderly people or people in need of
Rshift the automatic transmission out of special assistance. Do not activate the
park position P or shift manual trans- double lock when people are in the vehicle.
mission into neutral
Rstart the engine The double-lock function is activated if
you press the locking button twice when
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
locking the vehicle. It is then not possible
When leaving the vehicle, always take the to open the doors from inside the vehicle.
leave children and animals unattended in G WARNING
the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach If persons (particularly children) are
of children. exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged
period, there is a risk of serious or even
G WARNING fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-
If you attach heavy or large objects to the ticularly children) unattended in the vehi-
key, the key could be unintentionally cle.
turned in the ignition lock. This could
Key 69
Key functions Battery of the key

G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub-
stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a

risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
: % Unlocks the vehicle
; º Opens the tailgate
Batteries contain pollu-
= & Locks the vehicle tants. It is illegal to dis-
X To unlock centrally: press button :. pose of them with the
household rubbish. They
If you do not open the vehicle within must be collected sepa-
approximately 2 minutes of unlocking: rately and disposed of in an
Rthe vehicle is locked again. environmentally responsi-
Rprotection against theft is reactivated ble recycling system.
X To unlock and open the tailgate: press Dispose of batteries in an
and hold button ; on the key. environmentally responsi-
ble manner. Take dis-
X To lock centrally: press button =. charged batteries to a
The key centrally locks/unlocks: qualified specialist work-
shop or to a collection
Rthe doors
point for used batteries.
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap smart recommends that you have the bat-
When unlocking, the turn signals flash teries changed at a qualified specialist
once. When locking, they flash twice. workshop.
Only for England:
X To activate the double-lock function:
Replacing the battery
press button = twice. You require a CR 2016 3V cell battery.
It is then not possible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle.
Upon activation of the double-lock func-
tion, the turn signals flash twice long and
three times short.
Z
70 Key
X Remove screw : turning anti-clockwise

using a suitably sized Phillips screw-
driver and put in a safe place.
X Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a coin, into

the opening of the key. Turn the tool until
battery tray cover ; opens. When doing
so, do not hold cover ; shut.
X Remove battery tray cover ;.
X Remove battery =.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery
is free from lint, grease and all other
forms of contamination.
X Insert battery tray cover ; into the
housing and press to close.
X Replace screw : and tighten clockwise
using a suitably sized Phillips screw
driver.
X Check the function of all key buttons on
the vehicle.
Key 71
Problems with the key

You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the key. function of the key. Do this by pressing the % or &
button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

If this does not work:
X Change the key battery if necessary (Y page 69).
X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock
(Y page 74) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking
(Y page 74).
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the key. Do this by pressing the % or &
button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
The key is faulty.

X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock
(Y page 74) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking
(Y page 74).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or
interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 233).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 236).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. When
you turn the key, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Z
72 Doors
Doors If you press the locking button on the key

twice when locking the vehicle:
Rthe turn signals flash twice long and
G WARNING three times short
If children are left unsupervised in the Rthe double-lock function is activated
vehicle, they could: It is then not possible to open the doors
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other from inside the vehicle.
persons or road users

Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic
Unlocking and opening the doors from
the inside
trapped, for example
Rrelease the parking brake
park position P or shift manual trans-
Rstart the engine
X Pull door handle :.
leave children and animals unattended in
The door opens.
the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach
of children. You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
Preferably stow luggage or loads in the X Pull door handle :.
luggage compartment. Observe the loading The door unlocks and opens.
guidelines (Y page 204).
Only for England: If the vehicle has previously been locked
with the key, opening a door from the
G WARNING inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
When the double locks are activated, the system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 61).
doors can no longer be opened from the You can only open the rear doors from
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer inside the vehicle if they are not secured
get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There by the child-proof locks (Y page 60).
is a risk of injury. For England only:
Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- If when locking the vehicle you press twice
pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- on the locking button on the key:
dren, elderly people or people in need of
Rthe turn signals flash long twice and
special assistance. Do not activate the
double lock when people are in the vehicle. short three times
Rthe double-lock function is activated
It is then not possible to open the doors

Doors 73
Centrally locking or unlocking the If the vehicle has previously been locked
vehicle from the inside with the key, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 61).
from the inside. This can be useful if you
If a locked door is opened from the inside,
wish to lock the vehicle before pulling
the previous unlocking is taken into
away, for example.
account, if:
Rit was locked using the locking button for

the central locking, or
Rit was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked. If only the
driver's door had been previously
unlocked, then only the door which has been
opened form the inside is unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally
from the inside if the vehicle has been
X To lock: when the vehicle is unlocked, locked with the key.
press button :. Only for England:
If all the doors and the tailgate are If you press the locking button on the key
closed, the vehicle locks. Indicator twice when locking the vehicle:
lamp ; lights up.
Rthe turn signals flash twice long and
X To lock the vehicle from inside when
getting out: open the driver's door. three times short
Rthe double-lock function is activated
The front-passenger door, rear doors and
the tailgate must be closed. It is then not possible to open the doors
X Press the locking button (Y page 73).
X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds.
Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You Automatic locking feature
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap
are locked. The anti-theft alarm system
is primed.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
X To unlock: when the vehicle is locked,
press button :.
The vehicle is unlocked. Indicator
lamp ; goes out.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
You can open the rear doors from inside the
vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 60).
Z
74 Doors
X To deactivate: with the ignition X Turn the key clockwise from position 1
switched on, press and hold button : for as far as it will go.
about five seconds until a tone sounds. The door is unlocked.
X To activate with the ignition switched X Turn the key back and remove it.
on, press and hold button : for about
five seconds until a tone sounds.
The vehicle is locked automatically when Locking the driver's door (emergency
locking)
the ignition is switched on and the wheels

are turning. If you can no longer lock the vehicle using
You could therefore be locked out if: the remote control key, use the locking but-
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. ton on the instrument cluster (Y page 73).
Rthe X Open the driver's door.
vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dyna- X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
mometer. doors and the tailgate.

X Press the locking button (Y page 73).
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on or off in the smart Media-Sys- X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds.
tem; see the separate operating instruc- Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You
tions. could otherwise lock yourself out.
The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap
are locked. The anti-theft alarm system
Unlocking the driver's door (emer- is primed.
gency lock) X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
If you can no longer unlock the vehicle are locked.

using the remote control key, use the emer- If this does not work, use the emergency
gency lock. locking.
If you use the key in the emergency lock to X Open the driver's door.
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti- X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
theft alarm system will be triggered. doors and the tailgate.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 61). X Press the locking button (Y page 73).
X Insert the key into the emergency lock of X Check whether the front-passenger's
the driver's door as far as it will go. door and the rear doors are locked. If
i For right-hand-drive vehicles, the key necessary, carry out the following steps
must be inserted into the emergency lock on all doors.
of the passenger's door.
Luggage compartment 75
X Insert the tip of the key into slit :. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
X Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
will go to position 2. that there is sufficient clearance above
On the passenger side, the direction of and behind the tailgate.
rotation is reversed. i The opening dimensions of the tailgate
i For right-hand-drive vehicles, the key can be found in the "Vehicle data" sec-
on the driver's side must be turned tion (Y page 273).

clockwise, and anti-clockwise on the Preferably stow luggage or loads in the
front-passenger's side. luggage compartment. Observe the loading
X Close the driver's door. guidelines (Y page 204).
X Check that all the doors are locked. Do not leave the key in the luggage com-
partment. You could otherwise lock your-
i If you lock the vehicle using the emer- self out.
gency locking, the tailgate and fuel
filler flap are not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not primed. Opening or closing
Opening the tailgate
Luggage compartment
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If
the tailgate is open when the engine is
running, particularly if the vehicle is
moving, exhaust fumes could enter the
passenger compartment. There is a risk of
poisoning.
X If the vehicle is locked, first press the
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate % button on the key.
open. Press button :.
The tailgate is unlocked.
G WARNING or
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured X Press and hold the º button on the key.
or not secured sufficiently, they could The tailgate springs up slightly.
slip, tip over or be flung around and X Lift the tailgate upwards.
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of injury, especially when braking or
abruptly changing directions.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before
the journey.
Z
76 Side windows
Closing the tailgate X Slide emergency release lever : to the

left until the tailgate is unlocked.
Side windows
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts

in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
XPull the tailgate down and push closed. body are in the closing area. If somebody
XWhen leaving the vehicle, lock the vehi- becomes trapped, release the switch or
cle with the & button on the key. press the switch to open the side window
i As long as the vehicle is not locked, you again.
can open the tailgate again at any time.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they
Tailgate emergency release operate the side windows, particularly
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure When leaving the vehicle, always take the
that there is sufficient clearance above key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
and behind the tailgate. leave children unattended in the vehicle.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgate

can be found in the "Vehicle data" sec-
Front side window reversing feature
tion (Y page 273).
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from In vehicles with the comfort package, the
outside the vehicle, use the emergency side windows are equipped with an auto-
release on the inside of the tailgate. matic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window from
You can reach the emergency release via the travelling upwards during the automatic
luggage compartment. closing process, the side window opens
X Fold the rear seat backrest forward again automatically. During the manual
(Y page 206). closing process, the side window only
opens again automatically after the corre-
sponding switch is released. The automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and is no
substitute for your attention when closing
a side window.
Side windows 77
G WARNING
The reversing function does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rwhile resetting
This means that the reversing feature can-
not prevent someone being trapped in these

situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing, make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If someone
: Left
becomes trapped, press the switch to open
; Right
the side window again.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
G WARNING ignition lock.
If you close a side window again immedi- X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
ately after it has been blocked or reset, the responding button.
side window closes with increased or max- X To open fully: press the button beyond the
imum force. The reversing function is then point of resistance and release it.
not active. Parts of the body could be trap- Automatic closing is started.
ped in the closing area in the process. This X To close manually: pull the correspond-
poses an increased risk of injury or even
ing button and hold it.
fatal injury.
X Vehicles with the comfort package:
Make sure that no parts of the body are in
the closing area. To stop the closing proc- To close fully: pull the button beyond the
ess, release the switch or push the switch point of resistance and release it.
again to reopen the side window. Automatic closing is started.
X To interrupt automatic opening/closing:
press/pull the corresponding switch
Opening or closing the front side win- again.
dows i If you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance while opening, automatic
The switches for both side windows are
operation is started. In vehicles with
located on the driver's door. There is also a
the comfort package, you can also start
switch for the front-passenger side window
automatic operation when closing. To do
on the front-passenger door.
so, pull the switch beyond the point of
The switch on the driver’s door takes prec- resistance.
edence.
You can stop automatic operation by
pressing again.
i You can continue to operate the side
windows after turning the key to position
0 in the ignition lock or removing the
key. This function remains active for 3
minutes or until you open a door.
Z
78 Side windows
Hinged windows of rear doors side window is completely closed

(Y page 77).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window
remains closed after the button has been
released, the side window has been reset
correctly. If this is not the case, repeat
the steps above again.
X To open: fold lever : forwards.

X Push the hinged window out using
lever : until it engages.
X Push lever : back until it engages.
The hinged window is fixed.
X To close: fold lever : forwards.
X Tilt the hinged window inwards using
lever :.
X Push lever : back until it engages.
X Check, whether the hinged window is
locked.
Resetting the front side windows

You must reset each side window if:
Rthe side window opens again slightly
after being closed fully.
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
opened or closed.
X Close all doors.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the
door control panel until the side window
is completely closed (Y page 77).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding
switch on the door control panel until the
Folding top 79
Problems with the front side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side
window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process,

release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it X Close the side window.
is blocked by objects,
e.g. leaves in the win-
dow guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens
be closed and you can- again slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and
reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-
ture.
Folding top G WARNING

Children could become trapped if they
operate the folding top, particularly when
G WARNING unattended. There is a risk of injury.
During opening and closing, body parts in When leaving the vehicle, always take the
the sweep of the folding top can get trap- key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
ped. There is a risk of injury. leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When opening and closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep.
! Only open the folding top if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
Release the switch immediately if some-
may occur.
body becomes trapped.
Do not allow anything to protrude from
The opening or closing will stop.
the folding top. Otherwise, the seals
could be damaged.
Z
80 Folding top
Opening or closing the folding top

: To close
; To open
ignition lock (Y page 121).
X To open: press and hold the folding top
switch at position ; until the folding
top is in the desired position.
X To close: press and hold the folding top
switch at position : until the folding
top is completely closed.
i It is possible to open or close the fold-
ing top while driving up to a maximum
speed of 100 km/h.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the panoramic roof 81
Problems with the folding top

The folding top cannot If the folding top is obstructed during closing and reopens
be closed and you can- again slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after it is obstructed, press and hold the top
part of the folding top switch again until the folding top is

fully closed.
The folding top is closed with increased force.
i If the power supply is not sufficient, the folding top cannot be closed. In this case,
either charge the battery (Y page 235) or jump-start the vehicle (Y page 236).
Operating the roller sunblinds for the

panoramic roof
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle

interior from sunlight.
X To open: press the roller sunblind up by
the outer edge of handle : and slide it
backwards.
X To close: pull the roller sunblind
forward by the outer edge of handle :
until it engages.
Z
82
83

Correct driver's seat position ............. 84
Seats .............................................. 85
Steering wheel ................................. 89
Mirrors ........................................... 90
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.

84 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-

erly.
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Adjusting the seat (Y page 86)
els, series and optional equipment for When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
your vehicle that were available at the
Ryou are as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible.
differences are possible. Note that your
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea-
tures described. This is also the case for position.
systems and functions relevant to safety. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an

i Read the information on qualified spe-
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). almost vertical position.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering

Correct driver's seat position wheel adjustment (Y page 89).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is
G WARNING adjusted properly.
You could lose control of the vehicle while Adjusts the steering wheel (Y page 89)
driving if you:
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel sure that:
or mirror Ryou can hold the steering wheel with
Rfasten the seat belt.
your arms slightly bent.
There is a risk of an accident. Ryou can move your legs freely.
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or Ryou can see all the displays in the
mirror and fasten the seat belt before instrument cluster clearly.
starting the engine.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat
belts (Y page 40).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 42).
The seat belt should:
Rfit
snugly across your body
Rberouted across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across
the hip joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
mirror and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 90) in such a way that you have a
good view of road and traffic conditions.
Example
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 85).
Seats 85
Seats you could slide underneath the seat belt and

sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for
Important safety notes example. This poses an increased risk of
G WARNING injury or even fatal injury.
If children adjust the seats, they could Adjust the seat properly before beginning
become trapped, especially if they are your journey. Always ensure that the back-
unattended. There is a risk of injury. rest is in an almost vertical position and
that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.
leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags"

(Y page 44) and "Children in the vehicle"
G WARNING (Y page 47).
If the driver's seat is not correctly
engaged, it could unexpectedly move while ! To avoid damage to the seats and the
driving. This could cause you to lose con- seat heating, observe the following
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an information:
accident. Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
Always ensure that the driver's seat is liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them
engaged before starting the vehicle. as soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do
G WARNING not switch on the seat heating. The seat
You could lose control of the vehicle while heating should also not be used to dry
driving if you: the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel
or mirror see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or tools. The seats should only be occu-
mirror and fasten the seat belt before pied by passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation,
do not cover the seats with insulating
G WARNING
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
When adjusting a seat, you or another vehi- seat covers, child seats or booster
cle occupant could become trapped by the seats.
guide rail of the seat, for instance. There
is a risk of injury. ! Make sure that there are no objects in
Make sure that no one has any part of their the footwell under or behind the seats
body within the sweep of the seat when when moving the seats back. There is a
adjusting it. risk that the seats and/or the objects
could be damaged.
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved
the backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
Z
86 Seats
Adjusting the seat X Move the backrest forwards or backwards.

X Let go of release lever : again.
Seat height4
X Only variant 2: pull handle ; up or push
it down repeatedly until the seat has
reached the desired height.
Folding down the front-passenger seat

You can increase the size of the luggage
Illustration of variant 1
compartment by folding the front-
passenger seat backrest forwards.
Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 204) and the notes in the "Child
seat" section (Y page 52).
Folding down
Illustration of variant 2
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

X Lift handle = and slide the seat for-
wards or rearwards.
X Release lever = again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage
in position. Illustration of variant 1
Backrest angle
Variant 1
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X Turn handwheel : forwards or back-
wards.
Variant 2
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X Pull release lever :.
The backrest is released. Illustration of variant 2
4 Only driver's seat, depending on equipment.

Seats 87
Variant 1: Stowing head restraints in the rear

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its compartment
rearmost position.
X Turn handwheel : forward until the
desired seat backrest position is ach- G WARNING
ieved You could lose control of the vehicle while
Variant 2: driving if you:
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position. or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt
X Hold onto the backrest at the head
restraint with one hand. There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull release lever :. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
The backrest is released. steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your
X Fold the backrest forwards. seat belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
Folding back
The head restraints cannot provide the
G WARNING intended protection unless they are fitted
If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may and adjusted correctly. There is an
fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the increased risk of injury to the head and
event of an accident. neck in the event of an accident or sudden
braking, for example.
RAs a result, a backrest which is not
Always drive with the head restraints fit-
engaged would press you into the seat
ted. Ensure that the centre of the head
belt. The seat belt cannot perform its
restraints support the back of each vehicle
intended protective function and could
occupant's head at eye level before driving
additionally cause injury.
off.
RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or
loads in the boot.
Adjusting the head restraints
This poses an increased risk of injury.
Before every journey, make sure that the
backrest is engaged as described.
Variant 1:
X Turn handwheel : back until the desired
seat backrest position is achieved
Variant 2:
X Pull release lever :.
The backrest is released.
X Fold the backrest backwards.
X Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged
again.
Z
88 Seats
The head restraints can be adjusted to the X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
in-use position. When the rear seats are lock (Y page 121).
occupied, use this position. The rest posi- X To switch on: press button ;.
tion of the head restraints is used, e.g. Indicator lamp : in the button lights
when you wish to fold the rear seat backr- up.
ests forwards. X To switch off: press button ;.
X To raise (in-use position): pull the head Indicator lamp : in the button goes out.
restraint up until the head restraint
engages. i If the battery voltage is too low, the
X To lower (rest position): press release seat heating may switch off.
catch : and push the head restraint The seat heating switches off automati-
down. cally after about 10 minutes.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING
If you repeatedly switch on seat heating,
the seat cushion and backrest padding may
become very hot. The health of vehicle
occupants with limited temperature sensi-
tivity or a limited ability to react to
excessively high temperatures may be
affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating
repeatedly.
Steering wheel 89
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off prema- consumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating
will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
or mirror
There is a risk of an accident. : Release lever
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or ; To adjust the steering wheel height
mirror and fasten the seat belt before
X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
G WARNING X Set desired steering wheel height ;.
Children could become trapped by the X Push release lever : up completely.

steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a The steering column is locked.
risk of injury. X Check if the steering column is locked.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the To do so, try and push the steering wheel
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never up or down.
Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING
The steering wheel may move unexpectedly
if you adjust it while driving. This could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Make sure that the steering wheel is locked
before driving off. Never unlock the steer-
ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion.
Z
90 Mirrors
Mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors manually

Rear-view mirror
X To adjust the mirror: move lever : to the

right or left, up or down.
X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle
switch : forwards or back.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri-
cally
Exterior mirrors
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
or mirror
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or ignition (Y page 121).
mirror and fasten the seat belt before
X To select an exterior mirror: turn con-
trol = to position 1 for the left exte-
G WARNING rior mirror or to position 2 for the
right exterior mirror.
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
X To adjust the mirror: move control = to
image. Objects visible in the mirrors are
closer than they appear. You could misjudge the right or left, up or down.
the distance from road users driving The exterior mirrors can be heated by
behind you when changing lanes, for switching on the rear window heating
instance. There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 115).
You should therefore always look over your
shoulder to determine the actual distance Exterior mirror pushed out of position
from road users driving behind you.
If an exterior mirror has been pushed for-
wards or backwards out of position, push
the exterior mirror into the correct posi-
tion manually.
91

Exterior lighting .............................. 92
Interior lighting .............................. 96
Replacing bulbs ................................ 97
Windscreen wipers ........................... 101
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.

92 Exterior lighting
Useful information Converting to symmetrical dipped beam
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-

els, series and optional equipment for
tures described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
cialist workshops: (Y page 21).
X Open the service cover (Y page 216).
X Turn the screw with an appropriate tool

Exterior lighting one quarter of a turn toward °.
General notes Have the correct setting of the dipped beam
headlamps checked at a qualified special-
For reasons of safety, smart recommends ist workshop.
that you drive with the lights switched on
even during the daytime. In some coun- Converting to asymmetrical dipped beam
tries, operation of the headlamps varies after returning
due to legal requirements and self-
imposed obligations. Convert the headlamps back to asymmetri-
cal dipped beam as soon as possible after
crossing the border.
Driving abroad X Open the service cover (Y page 216).
X Turn the screw with an appropriate tool
General notes
one quarter of a turn toward q to the
If your journey takes you to countries where original position.
vehicles are driven on the opposite side of
Have the correct setting of the dipped-
the road to the country in which the vehicle
beam headlamps checked at a qualified
is registered, your headlamps must be
specialist workshop.
switched to symmetrical dipped beam as
soon as possible after crossing the border.
This prevents oncoming traffic from being
dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illumi-
nate as large an area of the edge of the car-
riageway.
Exterior lighting 93
Exterior lighting settings When in the Ã position the exterior

lighting switches off automatically if you:
Operation
Rswitch off the engine
Ropen the driver's door
Rlock the vehicle
Rdo not switch on the main-beam head-
lamps
Automatic headlamp mode

Ã is the preferred light switch setting.
The light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient

light (exception: poor visibility due to
: Combination switch control
weather conditions such as fog, snow or
; Marking spray):
3$ Lights off RWith the engine running: depending on
4T Side lamp, parking lamp, licence the ambient light conditions, the day-
plate lighting time driving lights or the side lamps or
5K Main-beam headlamps dipped-beam headlamps are switched on
6Ã Automatic headlamp mode, con- or off automatically.
trolled by the light sensor X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
7L Dipped-beam headlamps turn combination switch control : until
Ã is at marking ;.
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
dipped-beam headlamps may not be
switched on automatically if there is fog,
snow or other causes of poor visibility due
to the weather conditions such as spray.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
D Marking
E Combination switch middle ring The automatic headlamp feature is only an
Ì N Foglamps aid. The driver is responsible for the
vehicle's lighting at all times.
Í R Rear foglamp
The daytime driving lights improve the
If you hear a warning tone when you leave detectability of your vehicle during the
the vehicle, the lights may still be day.
switched on. When the dipped-beam headlamps are
X Turn combination switch control : switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
until Ã or $ is at marking ;. instrument cluster lights up and the day-
time driving lights switch off.
Z
94 Exterior lighting
Dipped-beam headlamps Rear foglamp

X To switch on: turn combination switch X To switch on: make sure that the side
control : until L is at marking ;. lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are
The L indicator lamp in the instru- switched on.
ment cluster lights up. X Turn combination switch middle ring E
until marking D is at R.
Side lamps The R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X To switch on: turn combination switch
control : until T is at marking ;. After releasing, the middle ring returns
automatically back to the neutral posi-
tion.
Foglamps X To switch off: turn combination switch
Only vehicles with front foglamps have the middle ring E until marking D is at
"Foglamps" function. R.
X To switch on: make sure that the side The R indicator lamp in the instru-
lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are ment cluster goes out.
switched on. After releasing, the middle ring returns
X Turn combination switch middle ring E automatically back to the neutral posi-
until marking D is at N. tion.
The N indicator lamp in the instru- i If you switch off the engine (only in the
ment cluster lights up. Ã position) or turn off the lights, the
After releasing, the middle ring returns rear foglamps are also switched off.
automatically back to the neutral posi-
tion. Adjusting the headlamp range
X To switch off: turn combination switch
middle ring E until marking D is at The headlamp range control allows you to
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
N.
to suit the vehicle load. The cone of light
The N indicator lamp in the instru-
changes when seats are occupied or when
ment cluster goes out.
the luggage compartment is loaded or
After releasing, the middle ring returns unloaded. This can impair visibility and
automatically back to the neutral posi- dazzle oncoming traffic.
tion.
i If you switch off the engine (only in the
Ã position) or turn off the lights, the
foglamps are also switched off.
Exterior lighting 95
in the direction of arrow : (right turn

signal) or ; (left turn signal).
The corresponding turn signal flashes
three times.
X To indicate: press the combination
switch beyond the pressure point in the
direction of arrow : (right turn signal)
or ; (left turn signal).
g Driver's seat is occupied or driver's Switching on the main-beam headlamps

seat and front-passenger seat are occu- and headlamp flasher
pied

Main-beam headlamps
1 All seats are occupied
2 All seats are occupied and luggage
compartment laden
3 Driver's seat is occupied and luggage
compartment is laden
4 This setting is not required
lock or start the engine.
X Turn headlamp range control : to the
position which corresponds to the load
in your vehicle.
X To switch on: start the engine.
X Turn the combination switch control
Switching on the turn signals until K or Ã (if available) is at
the marking.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X To deactivate: move combination
switch : back to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
X Start the engine. Headlamp flasher

X To indicate briefly: press the combina-
X To switch on: pull the combination
tion switch briefly to the pressure point
switch in the direction of arrow ;.
Z
96 Interior lighting
Hazard warning lamps Interior lighting

Overview
The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on if: : Interior lighting

Ran airbag is deployed ; Switches the left-hand reading lamp
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a on/off
speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a = Depending on the position of the
standstill switch:
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: Interior lighting switched on
press button :. Automatic interior lighting control on
All turn signals flash. If you now switch Interior lighting switched off
on a turn signal using the combination ? Switches the right-hand reading lamp
switch, only the turn signal lamp on the on/off
corresponding side of the vehicle will
flash. The interior lighting is switched on when a
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
door is open: if the corresponding door is
press button :. closed correctly the interior lighting goes
out.
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 10 km/h again after a full brake Interior lighting control
application.
If the doors are unlocked with the remote
i The hazard warning lamps still operate control, the interval timer for the interior
if the ignition is switched off. lighting is triggered. The interval timer
restarts when a door is opened.
The front interior lighting and the luggage
Headlamps misted up on the inside compartment light go out gradually.
Certain climatic and physical conditions The interior lighting interval timer is
may cause moisture to form in the head- switched off:
lamp. This moisture does not affect the Rif a door remains open, the interior
functionality of the headlamp. lighting switches off after 15 minutes
without dimming
Rif all doors (with additional locking
mechanism) are closed, the interior
lighting switches off after 15 seconds
Replacing bulbs 97
Rif all doors (without locking mechanism) replace these bulbs yourself. Contact a
are closed, the interior lighting qualified specialist workshop which has
switches off after 3 to 4 minutes the necessary specialist knowledge and
Ras soon as the engine is started and for as tools to carry out the work required.
long as the engine is running Headlamps and lamps are an important
aspect of vehicle safety. You must there-
fore make sure that these function cor-
Replacing bulbs rectly at all times. Have the headlamp set-
ting checked regularly.
G WARNING
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
become very hot during use. When replacing You can replace the following bulbs. The

a bulb, you could burn yourself on these details for the bulb type can be found in the
components. There is a risk of injury. legend.
Allow these components to cool down before
replacing the bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps : Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamp:

designed for that purpose. Only fit spare H4 60/55 W
bulbs of the same type and the specified ; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
voltage. = Foglamps: H16
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean
the glass tube when cold with alcohol or
spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during oper-
ation. Do not allow bulbs to come into con-
tact with liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 97).
If you require assistance replacing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tail lamps
If the new bulb still does not light up, con- : Tail lamp/brake lamp: P 21 5 W
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
; Rear foglamp: P 21 W
The daytime driving lights and part of the
= Reversing lamp: W 16 W
rear light clusters of your vehicle are
equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Z
98 Replacing bulbs
Tail lamps (vehicles with partial LEDs) : Interior lighting: W 5 W

: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
; Reversing lamp: W 16 W
Replacing the front bulbs
Turn signals
: Licence plate lighting: W 5 W
X To remove the cover in the front wheel

arch: switch off the lighting system.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Press spring clip : down.
X Slide cover ; back and remove it.
: Side turn signal lamps: WY 5 W

Replacing bulbs 99
X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and Front foglamps

remove.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
X To fit the cover in the front wheel arch:
insert cover ; again and lock in place.
Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the

front foglamps changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X Switch off the lights.
X Remove the two screws : at the bottom of
the front wheel arch using a suitable
tool.
X Bend back the cover using your hand.
X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and
X Switch off the lights. remove it.
X X Take the bulb out of the bulb holder.
Open the service cover (Y page 216).
X Remove cover :. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Pull out the connector. X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock-
X Simultaneously press retainer ;

wise until it engages.
X Bend the cover back into position.
forward and to the right and then remove
the lamp. X Tighten the two screws : again.
X Insert the new bulb and engage it in

place. Side turn signal lamps
X Insert the connector.
X Position cover : and press into place.
Z
100 Replacing bulbs
X Insert a flat tool into recess : and lever

side turn signal lamp ; forwards and
out.
X Remove the bulb holder from side turn
signal lamp ; by turning it a quarter
turn anti-clockwise.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Insert the bulb holder into side turn sig-
nal lamp ; and turn it a quarter turn
clockwise. Bulb holder
X Insert side turn signal lamp ;. : Tail lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without
partial LEDs)
; Turn signals
Replacing the rear bulbs = Reversing lamp
? Rear foglamp (vehicles without partial
Tail lamps LEDs)
X Switch off the lights. X Unclip four bulb holder tabs A and
X To remove: open the tailgate (Y page 75). carefully remove the bulb holder.
X Pull out the corresponding bulb.
X Insert the new bulb.
X Insert the bulb holder again.
Four bulb holder tabs A must audibly
engage.
X Insert the connector.
X Insert the lamp again.
X Tighten the two screws : on the tail
lamp again.
X Remove two screws : on the tail lamp Licence plate lighting

using a suitable slotted screwdriver.
X Carefully take out the lamp.
X To release the connector: insert a suit-
able slotted screwdriver under the plas-
tic hanger, lift a small plastic piece
upwards and remove the connector.
X To remove: release catch : of the lamp

lens using a suitable tool.
X Remove the lamp lens.
Windscreen wipers 101
scratch the glass if wiping takes place

when the windscreen is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the wind-
screen wipers in dry weather conditions,
always operate them using washer fluid.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears
on the windscreen after the vehicle has
been washed in an automatic car wash,
this may be due to wax or other residue.
Clean the windscreen with washer fluid
X Take bulb : out of the bulb holder. after an automatic car wash.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the

X Re-insert the lamp lens into the licence windscreen becomes dirty in dry weather
plate lamp. conditions, the windscreen wipers may
be activated inadvertently. This could
damage the windscreen wiper blades or
Replacing the interior lighting scratch the windscreen.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
X Remove lamp lens : with a flat tool, e.g.

a screwdriver.
Combination switch
X Take the bulb to be replaced out of the
: Control for wiping frequency and sen-
bulb holder. sitivity of the rain sensor
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
2 0 Windscreen wipers off
X Insert lamp lens :.
3 © Intermittent wipe
Ã Automatic wipe (rain sensor)
4 1 Continuous wipe, slow
Windscreen wipers
5 2 Continuous wipe, fast
Switching the windscreen wipers B î Wipes with washer fluid
on/off
X To switch on: turn the key to position 1 or
! Do not operate the windscreen wipers 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).
when the windscreen is dry, as this could X Press the combination switch to the ©
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust position or 1.
that has collected on the windscreen can
or
Z
102 Windscreen wipers
X Start the engine (Y page 121). Switching the rear window wiper on/off
X Press the combination switch down or up
to the corresponding position.
X To wipe with washer fluid î: pull the
combination switch towards the steering
wheel.
X To switch off: press the combination
switch to position 0.
Position 2 changes to position 1 when the
engine is stopped.
In position 1 or in the © position, the
windscreen wipers stop automatically when Combination switch
the engine is stopped and the driver's door : Control

is opened. 2 $ Rear window wiper off
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in position 3 è Rear window wiper on
Ã the windscreen wipers stop automat- 4 ô Wiping with washer fluid
ically when the engine is stopped.
The windscreen will no longer be wiped
lock or start the engine (Y page 121).
properly if the wiper blades are worn. This
X Turn control : on the combination
could prevent you from observing the traf-
fic conditions. switch to the corresponding position.
Intermittent wipe Replacing the wiper blades

Vehicles with a rain sensor: the appropri- Important safety notes
ate wiping frequency is automatically set
according to the intensity of the rain. With G WARNING
intermittent wiping you can also adjust the If the windscreen wipers begin to move
sensitivity of the rain sensor using con- while you are changing the wiper blades,
trol :. When the sensitivity is set to high, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There
the windscreen wiper wipes more fre- is a risk of injury.
quently. Always switch off the windscreen wipers
X To switch on: start the engine and ignition before changing the wiper
(Y page 121). blades.
X Press the combination switch to the Ã
! To avoid damaging the windscreen
position. wiper blades, make sure that you touch
The windscreen wipers sweep once. only the wiper arm of the windscreen
wiper.
! Never open the service cover/tailgate
if a windscreen wiper arm has been fol-
ded away from the windscreen/rear win-
dow.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm with- X Press the two release clips ; on mount-
out a wiper blade back onto the winding ? in the direction of arrow = and
screen/rear window. pull away from the wiper arm.
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly X Slide wiper blade : in the direction of
when you change the wiper blade. If you arrow A until the wiper blade securing
release the windscreen wiper arm with- hook is revealed.
out a wiper blade and it falls onto the X Remove wiper blade :.
windscreen/rear window, the wind-
screen/rear window may be damaged by Fitting the wiper blades
the force of the impact.
smart recommends that you have the wiper
blades changed at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
ignition lock (Y page 121).
X Press the combination switch to the 5
position (Y page 101). X Slide new wiper blade : in the direc-
The wiper arms move slowly upwards. tion of arrow ? onto mounting = of
X When the wiper arms are vertical in rela- wiper arm ;.
tion to the service cover, turn the key to Wiper blade : engages.
position 0 and remove it from the igni- X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
tion lock. correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- X Fold wiper arm ; back onto the wind-
screen. screen.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
Z
104 Windscreen wipers
X Turn wiper blade ; in the direction of

the arrow until it is released from the
retainer on the wiper arm.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Fitting a wiper blade

X Push new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm : until you feel it engage.
X Turn wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear

window.
Problems with the windscreen wipers

The windscreen wip- The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning.
ers do not stop or con- X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as
tinue wiping with the you do so and switch off the engine.
same speed regardless X
For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the igni-
of a change in posi-
tion lock and open the driver's door.
tion.
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Then try to
start the engine again.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified special-
ist workshop.

The windscreen wip- Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen
ers are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as
you do so and switch off the engine.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the igni-
tion lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds.
The windscreen wiper The windscreen wiper drive has stopped for safety reasons.
has stopped in the X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified special-
middle of the wind- ist workshop.
screen.
The windscreen wip- The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
ers fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Z
106
107
Useful information ........................... 108

Overview of climate control systems .... 108
Operating the climate control system ... 111
Adjusting the air vents ...................... 117
>> Climate control.

108 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information i The integrated filter can filter out

most particles of dust and as well as pol-
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- len. With automatic climate control,
els, series and optional equipment for odours carried in the air are also
your vehicle that were available at the reduced. A clogged filter reduces the
time of going to press. Country-specific amount of air supplied to the vehicle
differences are possible. Note that your interior. For this reason, you should
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- always observe the interval for replac-
tures described. This is also the case for ing the filter, which is specified in the
systems and functions relevant to safety. Service Booklet. As it depends on envi-
ronmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
i Read the information on qualified spe- pollution, the interval may be shorter
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). than stated in the Service Booklet.
Overview of climate control systems

>> Climate control.
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise mist up.
To prevent the windows from misting up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rair-conditioning system/automatic cli-
mate control: switch on the cooling with
air dehumidification function
Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" func-
tion briefly, if required
The heating, air-conditioning system and
the automatic climate control regulate the
temperature and humidity in the vehicle
interior. They also filter undesirable sub-
stances out of the air.
The heating, air-conditioning system and
automatic climate control can only be
operated when the engine is running. They
only function optimally when the side win-
dows are closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired
interior temperature will be reached
more quickly.
Overview of climate control systems 109
Heating/air-conditioning system control panel
: Sets the air distribution (Y page 113)

; Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (air-conditioning system only)
(Y page 112)
>> Climate control.

= Sets the airflow (Y page 114)
? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 115)
Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mir-
rors only)
A Sets the temperature (Y page 113)
B Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 117)
Notes on using the heating/air-condi- perature control A clockwise as far as

tioning system possible.
Only use the "Windscreen demisting"
Heating/air-conditioning system function briefly until the windscreen is
Below, you can find a number of tips and clear again.
recommendations for optimum use of the RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating/air-conditioning system. heating of the vehicle interior: briefly
RSwitch on climate control by turning set airflow control = to 3 or 4.
control = clockwise to the desired RRecommendation for a constant interior
position (except position 0). temperature: set air flow control = to
RChange the temperature settings in small position 1 or 2.
increments only. ROnly use the air-recirculation mode
To increase and reduce the temperature briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out-
turn control A clockwise or anti-clock- side odours or when in a tunnel. The win-
wise. dows could otherwise mist up as no fresh
RRecommendation for demisting front air is drawn into the vehicle in air-
windows at low exterior temperatures or recirculation mode.
in rain: switch air distribution con-
trol : to the z position. Deactivate Automatic start/stop system
air-recirculation mode À. Turn air- During automatic engine switch-off, the
flow control = to position 4.Turn tem- climate control only operates at a reduced
capacity. If you require the full climate
110 Overview of climate control systems
control output, you can switch off the auto-

matic start/stop system by pressing the
automatic start/stop system button
(Y page 125).
>> Climate control.
Operating the climate control system 111
Automatic climate control panel
: Increases the airflow (Y page 114)

; Demists the windscreen (Y page 114)
= Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 117)
>> Climate control.

? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 115)
Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mir-
rors only)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 113)
B Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 113)
C Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 111)
D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 112)
E Reduces the airflow (Y page 114)
F Sets the temperature (Y page 113)
Optimum use of automatic climate con- Automatic start/stop system

trol During automatic engine switch-off, the
Automatic climate control climate control only operates at a reduced
capacity. If you require the full climate
Below, you can find a number of notes and control output, you can switch off the auto-
recommendations to help you use climate matic start/stop system by pressing the
control optimally. automatic start/stop system button
RActivate climate control primarily (Y page 125).
using the Ã button.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting"
Operating the climate control system
function briefly until the windscreen is Switching the climate control on/off
clear again.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode General notes
briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out- When the climate control is switched off,
side odours or when in a tunnel. The win- the air supply and air circulation are also
dows could otherwise mist up as no fresh switched off. The windows could mist up.
air is drawn into the vehicle in air-
recirculation mode.
112 Operating the climate control system
Therefore, only switch off climate control dehumidified. The windows can mist up
briefly. more quickly. Therefore, only switch off
cooling with air dehumidification for a
Switching the sound on/off short period.
The cooling with air dehumidification
Heating/air-conditioning system function is only available when the engine
X Start the engine (Y page 121). is running. The air inside the vehicle is
X To switch on: turn airflow control = cooled and dehumidified according to the
clockwise to the desired position temperature selected.
(except position 0) (Y page 109). The "Cooling with air-dehumidification"
X To switch off: turn airflow control = function does not operate at low outside
anti-clockwise to position 0 temperatures.
(Y page 109). Condensation may drip from the underside
of the vehicle when cooling mode is active.
Automatic climate control This is normal and not a sign that there is a
>> Climate control.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the malfunction.

ignition lock or start the engine
(Y page 121). Switching the sound on/off
X To switch on: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp under the Ã button Air-conditioning system
X Start the engine (Y page 121).
lights up.
X Set airflow control = clockwise to posi-
or
X Press the ó button. tion 1 or higher (Y page 114).
X To switch on: press the ¿ button.
or
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button
X Press the ¬ button.
lights up.
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
X To switch on: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp under the ^ button
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button
lights up.
goes out.
or
X Press the ô button repeatedly until Automatic climate control
all the indicator lamps go out. X Start the engine (Y page 121).
X To switch on: press buttons ó and
¿.
Switching cooling with air dehumidi- The indicator lamp under the ¿ button
fication on/off lights up.
X To switch off: press the ¿ button.
General notes
The indicator lamp under the ¿ button
The "Cooling with air-dehumidification" goes out.
function is only available with the air-
conditioning system or automatic climate
control.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air
inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The
air inside the vehicle will also not be
Setting climate control to automatic Automatic climate control

mode X Start the engine (Y page 121).
General notes X To increase or reduce: push temperature
slider F to the right or left (Y page 111).
This function is only available with auto-
matic climate control. For the maximum or minimum tempera-
ture, push slider F completely to the
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
right or left (Y page 111).
maintained automatically at a constant
level. The system automatically regulates Only change the temperature setting in
the temperature of the dispensed air, the small increments. Start at 22 †.
airflow and the air distribution.
Setting automatic mode Setting the air distribution

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the Air distribution settings
>> Climate control.

(Y page 121). Heating/air-conditioning system
X To switch on: press the Ã button. z Directs the airflow through the
The indicator lamp under the Ã button demister vents
lights up. a Directs the airflow through the foot-
X To switch to manual mode: press the ó
well and demister vents
or ô button. O Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air vents
or
S Directs the airflow through the
X Press the Á, P or O button.
centre, side and footwell vents
or P Directs the airflow through the
centre and side air vents
The indicator lamp under the Ã button
goes out. i Recommendation for air distribution
in winter: set thea setting.
i If you adjust one of the functions by Recommendation for air distribution in
hand, the indicator lamp under the Ã summer: set the P setting.
button goes out. All other functions con-
tinue to be regulated automatically. Automatic climate control
Á Directs the airflow through the
demister vents
Setting the temperature P Directs the airflow through the
Heating/air-conditioning system centre and side air vents
O Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air vents
X To increase or reduce: turn temperature
control A clockwise or anti-clockwise i You can also activate several of the air
(Y page 109). distribution settings simultaneously. In
order to do this, press several of the air
Change the temperature settings in small
distribution buttons. The air is then
increments only.
routed through different air vents.
Recommendation for air distribution in Demisting the windscreen

winter: set theÁ and O settings.
Recommendation for air distribution in General notes
summer: set the P setting. You can use this function to demist the
windscreen or to demist the inside of the
Setting the air distribution windscreen and the side windows.
Heating/air-conditioning system i You should only select the "Windscreen

demisting" function until the wind-
screen is clear again.
X Turn air distribution control : clock-
wise or anti-clockwise until the indi- Switching the sound on/off
cator is at the desired position
(Y page 109). Heating/air-conditioning system
i You can turn the indicator to a position
between two symbols. There are inter- X To switch on: turn air distribution con-
>> Climate control.
mediate levels between the air distri- trol : to the z position (Y page 109) .
bution positions. X Turn airflow control = to position 4
(Y page 109).
Automatic climate control
X Turn temperature control A clockwise
as far as possible (Y page 109).
X Press one or more of the Á, O or
X Slide air distribution control B to the
P buttons.
right (Y page 109).
The indicator lamp next to the respec-
X To switch off: turn air distribution con-
tive button selected lights up.
trol : to the desired position (apart
from the z position) (Y page 109).
Setting the airflow X Turn air distribution control = and
temperature control A anti-clockwise
Heating/air-conditioning system to the desired position (Y page 109).
X To increase or reduce: turn airflow con- X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
trol = clockwise or anti-clockwise to
one of the four detents (Y page 109).
(Y page 121).
X To switch on: press the ¬ button.
Automatic climate control The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
X Start the engine (Y page 121). lights up. Automatic mode Ã is deac-
X To increase: press the ó button. tivated.
With each press of the ó button, one The ¬ "Demist windscreen" function
indicator lamp next to the airflow but- switches the automatic climate control
tons lights up. to the following functions:
X To decrease: press the ô button. Rcooling with air dehumidification on
With each press of the ô button, one Rhigh airflow
indicator lamp next to the airflow but-
tons goes out.
Rair distribution to the windscreen and i You should only select this setting
front side windows until the windscreen is clear again.
Rair-recirculation mode off
X To switch off: press the ¬ button.
X Activate the windscreen wipers.
or X Set the air distribution to ¬.
X Press the Ã button.
i You should only select this setting
or until the windscreen is clear again.
X Press the À button.
or
X Press the Á, P or O button. Rear window heating
The indicator lamp above the ¬ button General notes
goes out.
The rear window heating is turned off. The rear window heating has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
>> Climate control.

soon as the window is clear.
Demisting the windows The rear window heating can only be
switched on and off when the engine is run-
Windows misted up on the inside ning.
The rear window heating automatically
Heating/air-conditioning system switches off after approximately
X Air-conditioning system: activate the 10 minutes.
¿ "Cooling with air dehumidifica- Vehicles with heated exterior mirrors:
tion" function. when you switch on the rear window heating,
X If the windows continue to mist up, acti- the exterior mirrors are also heated. When
vate the "Windscreen demisting" func- the rear window heating is switched off,
tion (Y page 114). the exterior mirror heating will also turn
i You should only select this setting off.
until the windscreen is clear again.
Switching the sound on/off
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu- Heating/air-conditioning system
midification function. X Start the engine (Y page 121).
X Activate automatic mode Ã. X To switch on: press the ¤ button.
X If the windows continue to mist up, acti- The indicator lamp in the ¤ button
vate the "Windscreen demisting" func- lights up.
tion ¬. X To switch off: press the ¤ button.
i You should only select this setting The indicator lamp in the ¤ button
until the windscreen is clear again. goes out.
Windows misted up on the outside

Heating/air-conditioning system
X Activate the windscreen wipers.
X Set the air distribution to z.

X To switch on: press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp above the¤ button
lights up.
X To switch off: press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp above the ¤ button
goes out.
>> Climate control.
Adjusting the air vents 117
Problems with the rear window heating

The rear window heat- The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
ing has switched off X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
prematurely or cannot lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
heating can be activated again.
Switching the air-recirculation mode or

on/off X Press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp above the À button
General notes
goes out.
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
>> Climate control.

you are in a tunnel or if unpleasant odours
are entering the vehicle from outside. The Adjusting the air vents
air already inside the vehicle will then be
recirculated. Important safety notes
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, G WARNING
the windows can mist up more quickly, in Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
particular at low temperatures. Only use air vents. This could result in burns or
air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the
the windows misting up. air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
Switching the sound on/off
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
Heating/air-conditioning system outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow
X
to another area of the vehicle interior.
Start the engine (Y page 121).
X To switch on: slide control B to the left
G WARNING
(Y page 109).
If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant
X To switch off: slide control B to the
into the vehicle's ventilation system, it
right (Y page 109). may ignite. There is a risk of fire.
Automatic climate control Never spray these or other agents into the
ventilation system. Always have work on the
X Start the engine (Y page 121). ventilation system carried out at a quali-
X To switch on: press the À button.
The indicator lamp above theÀ button
lights up.
X To switch off: press the À button.
or
Z
118 Adjusting the air vents
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh X To open the centre air vent: hold centre
air through the air vents into the vehicle air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt
interior, please observe the following outwards until the vent openings can be
notes: seen.
Rkeep the air inlet between the service
cover and the windscreen free of block-
ages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Setting the side air vents
Rnever cover the vents or ventilation
grilles in the vehicle interior.
i For optimum climate control in the
vehicle, open the air vents fully.
Setting the centre air vents

>> Climate control.
X To adjust the air direction: hold side air

vent ; in the middle and turn and/or tilt
in the desired direction up, down, to the
left or to the right.
X To close the side air vent: hold side air
vent ; in the middle and tilt inwards
until the vent openings can no longer be
X
seen.
To adjust the air direction: hold centre
X To open the side air vent: hold side air
air vent : or ; in the middle and turn
and/or tilt it in the desired direction vent ; in the middle and tilt outwards
up, down, to the left or to the right. until the vent openings can be seen.
X To close the centre air vent: hold centre Demister vent : cannot be adjusted.
air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt
inwards until the vent openings can no
longer be seen.
119

Running-in notes ............................. 120
Driving ......................................... 120
>> Driving and parking.

Manual transmission ......................... 127
Automatic transmission .................... 128
Refuelling ...................................... 136
Parking .......................................... 138
Driving tips ................................... 140
Driving systems ............................... 145
120 Driving
Useful information RDo not shift down a gear manually in

order to brake.
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- RVehicles with automatic transmission:
els, series and optional equipment for if possible, do not depress the acceler-
your vehicle that were available at the ator pedal beyond the pressure point
time of going to press. Country-specific (kickdown).
differences are possible. Note that your RVehicles with automatic transmission:
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- ideally drive in program E for the first
tures described. This is also the case for 1500 km.
systems and functions relevant to safety. After 1500 km, you may gradually bring the
i Read the information on qualified spe- vehicle up to full road and engine speeds.
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). You should also observe these notes on run-
ning-in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Running-in notes Observe the maximum permissible speed.
In certain driving and driving safety sys- Driving
tems, the sensors adjust automatically
while a certain distance is being driven Important safety notes
after the vehicle has been delivered or G WARNING
after repairs. Full system effectiveness is
Objects in the driver's footwell may
not reached until the end of this teach-in
restrict the clearance around the pedals or
procedure.
block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises
New or replaced brake pads/linings and the operating and road safety of the vehi-
discs only reach their optimum braking cle. There is a risk of an accident.
effect after several hundred kilometres of
driving. Compensate for the reduced brak-
ing effect by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do
The first 1500 km not use loose floormats and do not place
several floormats on top of one another.
If you treat the engine with sufficient care
from the very start, you will be rewarded G WARNING
with excellent performance for the Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct
remainder of the engine's life. usage of the pedals, e.g.:
RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and Rshoes with thick soles
engine speeds for the first 1500 km. Rshoes with high heels
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during
Rslippers
this period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
RChange gear in good time, before the rev
counter needle is Ô of the way to the red Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
area of the rev counter. usage of the pedals.
Driving 121
G WARNING Key positions

If you switch off the ignition while driv-
ing, safety-relevant functions are only

available with limitations, or not at all.
This could affect, for example, the power
steering and the brake boosting effect. You
will require considerably more effort to
steer and brake. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Do not switch off the ignition while driv-
ing.
G WARNING g To remove the key

If the parking brake has not been fully 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
released when driving, the parking brake as the windscreen wipers
can: 2 Ignition (power supply for all consum-
Roverheat and cause a fire ers) and drive position
3 To start the engine
Rlose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. The steering wheel is locked when the key
Release the parking brake fully before is removed from the ignition lock.
driving off.
! Do not warm up the engine when the Starting the engine

vehicle is stationary. Drive off immedi-
ately. Avoid high engine speeds and
driving at full throttle until the engine G WARNING
has reached its operating temperature. If children are left unsupervised in the
Only shift the automatic transmission to vehicle, they could:
the desired drive position when the
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
vehicle is stationary.
persons or road users
Where possible, avoid spinning the
Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic
drive wheels when pulling away on slip-
pery roads. You could otherwise damage
the drive train. trapped, for example
Rrelease the parking brake
park position P or shift manual trans-
Rstart the engine
leave children and animals unattended in
Z
122 Driving
the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach i You can start the engine in transmis-
of children. sion positions P and N.
In order to start the engine in transmis-
G WARNING
sion position N you must depress the

Combustion engines emit poisonous brake pedal and keep it depressed.
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poi- Starting procedure
soning. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Therefore never leave the engine running
in enclosed spaces without sufficient ven-
lock (Y page 121) and release it as soon as
tilation.
the engine is running.
G WARNING
Pulling away
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can General notes
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system
or parts of the engine that heat up. There is G WARNING
a risk of fire. Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Carry out regular checks to make sure that If the engine speed is above the engine
there are no flammable foreign materials idling speed and you then engage trans-
in the engine compartment or in the exhaust mission position D or R, the vehicle may
system. accelerate suddenly. There is a risk of an
accident.
! Do not depress the accelerator when When engaging transmission position D or
R, always keep the brake pedal firmly
i The engine runs at a higher engine depressed and do not depress the acceler-
speed during a cold start so that the cat- ator pedal at the same time.
alytic converter can reach operating
temperature more quickly. The sound of ! Vehicles with manual transmission:
the engine may change as a result. change gear in good time and avoid spin-
ning the wheels. You could otherwise
Manual transmission damage the vehicle.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it ! Release the parking brake before driv-
depressed. ing off. The parking brake can otherwise
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
overheat, malfunction and wear out
quickly.
X Engage neutral.
Accelerate gently when pulling away.
Automatic transmission The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away.
X Shift the transmission to position P You can open the doors from the inside at
(Y page 129). any time.
The transmission position display in the
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
multifunction display shows P
ing feature (Y page 73).
(Y page 129).
Driving 123
Vehicles with automatic transmission: you Automatic start/stop system

can only shift the transmission from posi-
tion P to the desired transmission position Introduction

if: The automatic start/stop system switches
Rthe ignition is switched on the engine off automatically if the vehicle
Ryou depress the brake pedal and keep it is stopped under certain conditions.
depressed and When pulling away again, the engine starts
Ryou press release button on the selector automatically. The automatic start/stop
lever (Y page 129). system thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehi-
Only then is the shift lock released.
cle.
i Vehicles with automatic transmission:
transmission shifts take place at higher General notes
engine speeds after a cold start. This
helps the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature more quickly.
Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling
away forwards or in reverse on an uphill
gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short
time after you have removed your foot from
the brake pedal. This gives you enough time
to move your foot from the brake pedal to
the accelerator pedal and depress it before : Start/stop display (conditions are met)
the vehicle begins to roll. ; Start/stop display (conditions not met)
G WARNING The automatic start/stop system is auto-

After a while, hill start assist no longer matically activated when you start the
holds the vehicle and it may roll away. engine with the key.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. The indicator lamp in the automatic start/
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the stop system button lights up if the auto-
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never matic start/stop system has been deacti-
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill vated manually (Y page 125) or as the result
start assist. of a malfunction.
Hill start assist is not active if:

Ryou pull away on level ground
Ryou pull away in a forward gear on a down-
hill slope
Ron vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, the transmission is in position N
Rthe parking brake is engaged
Resp® is malfunctioning.
Z
124 Driving
Automatic start/stop function Vehicles with manual transmission

The automatic start/stop system switches
General notes the engine off automatically if you stop the
If the automatic start/stop system auto-
vehicle.
matically switches off the engine, the è
X Brake the vehicle.
symbol is shown in the instrument cluster.
X Engage neutral (Y page 127).
This is the case if, among other things:
X Release the clutch pedal.
Rthe indicator lamp in the automatic
The engine is switched off automati-
start/stop system button does not light
cally.
up
Rthe outside temperature is within the Vehicles with automatic transmission
range that is suitable for the system If the vehicle is stopped in transmission
Rthe engine is at normal operating tem- position D or N, the ECO start/stop function
perature switches off the engine automatically.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle inte-
i This is also the case if you have man-
rior has been reached
ually activated the switch.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
Rthe system detects that the windscreen is
Automatic engine start
not misted up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on General notes
Rthe tailgate is closed The engine is started automatically if:
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driv- Ryou switch off the automatic start/stop
er's seat belt is fastened system by pressing the automatic start/
If not all conditions for automatic start/ stop system button
stop system are fulfilled, the ç symbol Ryou open the tailgate
is shown. Rthe vehicle starts to roll
i All of the vehicle's systems except the Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
climate control remain active when the deviates from the set range
engine is switched off automatically. Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
This is also the case if you exit the vehi- screen when the air-conditioning system
cle. If you wish to exit the vehicle, is switched on
always turn off the ignition and secure Rthe battery's charge status is too low
the vehicle against rolling away.
Vehicles with manual transmission
i The è symbol flashes and a warning
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
tone sounds if:
is depressed.
Rthe automatic start/stop system
switches the engine off automatically, The engine is started automatically if you
and depress the clutch pedal.
Ryou take off your seat belt, and
Ryou open the driver's door
Vehicles with a colour display: in addi-

tion, the When exiting: remove key
warning message appears.
Driving 125
Vehicles with automatic transmission

The engine is started automatically if you:
Rrelease the brake pedal when in trans-

mission position D or N
Rrelease the brake pedal with manual
transmission activated
Rmove the transmission out of position P
Shifting the transmission to position P

does not start the engine.
Switching the automatic start/stop sys-

tem on and off
X To deactivate: press automatic start/

stop system button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up.
X To activate: press automatic start/stop
system button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out.
i If indicator lamp : is on, the auto-
matic start/stop system has been deac-
tivated manually or as the result of a
malfunction. The engine will then not be
switched off automatically when the
vehicle stops.
Z
126 Driving
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
motor can be heard. X Switch off the engine before attempting to start the engine
again (Y page 139).
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 121). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will
drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter X Refuel the vehicle.
motor can be heard.
The fuel gauge indi-
cates empty.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 236).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too
high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a

ning smoothly and is mechanical component of the engine management system.
misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Manual transmission 127

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the
ture exceeds 110 †. engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

The red coolant tem- X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
perature warning to cool down.
lamp comes on while X Check the coolant level (Y page 218). Observe the warning
the engine is running. notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
A warning tone also
sounds. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be
Vehicles with a col- faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being
our display: the Stop cooled sufficiently.
Switch off engine X If the coolant temperature is below 110 †, you can continue
message appears. driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Manual transmission
Gear lever
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.
! If you shift to 5th gear, you must ensure
that the gear lever is firmly pushed to
the right. Otherwise, you could shift
unintentionally into 3rd gear and dam-
age the transmission.
If you shift down at too high a speed 1 - 5 Forward gears
(transmission braking), this can cause k Reverse gear
the engine to overrev, leading to engine
damage.
Do not use the clutch bite point to keep Shifting to neutral
the vehicle stationary on uphill gradi-
ents. There is otherwise a risk of dam-
aging the clutch.
! On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden, you
must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time.
By doing so, you will make use of the
braking effect of the engine. This
relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
Z
128 Automatic transmission

X Move the gearshift lever to position :.
Engaging reverse gear

! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you
could damage the transmission.
All vehicles except for smart 66 kw Turbo
X Engage neutral (Y page 127). Vehicles with a monochrome display
X Press the gear lever to the right and then
pull it back.
Vehicles with a colour display

X Shift one gear up or down according to
smart 66 kw Turbo gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display of the
X Engage neutral (Y page 127). instrument cluster.
X Pull collar : upwards.
Further information on the transmission
X Press the gear lever to the right and then
display:
pull it back.
RVehicles with a monochrome display
i When reverse gear is selected, the auto- (Y page 157)
matic start/stop system is not available. RVehicles with a colour display
The automatic start/stop system is not (Y page 159)
available until you drive faster than
10 km/h again.
Additional information about the auto- Automatic transmission
matic start/stop system (Y page 123).
G WARNING
Gearshift recommendation
If the engine speed is above the idling
The gearshift recommendations assist you speed and you engage transmission posi-
in adopting an economical driving style. tion D or R, the vehicle could pull away
suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.
Automatic transmission 129
When engaging transmission position D or Transmission position and drive pro-

R, always firmly depress the brake pedal gram display
and do not simultaneously accelerate.
The current transmission position and

drive program appear in the multifunction
G WARNING display.
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is
a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always
switch to parking position P. Prevent the
parked vehicle from rolling away by apply-
ing the parking brake.
Selector lever
: Transmission position display
; Transmission mode display
j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
X To shift transmission position: press
release button : and shift the gear
lever to the desired transmission posi-
tion.
When you shift the transmission from posi-
tions N or P to position R, the ignition must
also be switched on.
i When you shift the transmission from
positions D or R to position N, you do not
need to press release button :.
Z
Transmission positions A Neutral

B Park position Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the
This prevents the vehicle from automatic transmission could be

rolling away when stopped. damaged.
Only shift the transmission into No power is transmitted from the
position P (Y page 129) when the engine to the drive wheels.
vehicle is stationary. The park-
Releasing the parking brake and
ing lock should not be used as a
brake pedal will allow you to
brake when parking. Always apply
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
the parking brake in addition to
push it or tow it away.
the parking lock in order to
secure the vehicle. If esp® is deactivated or faulty:
In the event of a malfunction of shift the transmission to posi-
the vehicle's electronics, the tion N if the vehicle is in danger
transmission may lock. Informa- of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
tion on manually disconnecting ! Rolling in neutral N can lead
the selector lever lock to damage to the transmission.
(Y page 135).
7 Drive
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a quali- The automatic transmission
fied specialist workshop. changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position R when the vehicle is Driving tips
stationary.
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is
in transmission position D. Gearshifting
is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the
automatic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown X Press program selector button : to

change the drive program.
If you want maximum acceleration, use
The letter of the selected drive program
kickdown:

appears in the multifunction display.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point. E Economy Comfortable, economical
The transmission shifts to a lower gear driving
depending on the engine speed.
S Standard Dynamic, agile driving
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back More information on drive programs
up. (Y page 131).
Rocking the vehicle free Driving programs

Shifting back and forth between transmis-
Drive program E (Economy)
sion positions D and R can help to free up
the vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. Drive program E is characterised by the
X Shift the selector lever alternately following:
between positions D and R. Rcomfort-oriented engine settings
The vehicle's engine management system Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
limits the speed to a maximum of 9 km/h the automatic transmission shifting up
when shifting back and forth. sooner
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
Program selector button driven at lower engine speeds and the
The program selector button allows you to wheels being less likely to spin
choose between drive programs with dif-
ferent driving characteristics. Drive program S (standard)
The automatic transmission switches to Drive program S is characterised by the
drive program E every time the engine is following:
started. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later.
Ras a result of the later automatic trans-
mission shift points, the fuel consump-
tion possibly being higher.
Manual gearshifting
General notes
You can shift the gears manually using
either the selector lever or the gearshift
paddles. The transmission must be in posi-
tion D.
Z
If it is permissible, the automatic trans- Short-term setting (vehicles with Sports

mission shifts to the next highest or next package)
lowest gear.
To use manual gearshifting, you have two

possibilities:
Rlong-term setting
Rshort-term setting (vehicles with Sports
package)
If you activate the manual gearshift set-
ting, the currently selected gear is shown
in the multifunction display instead of D.
Long-term setting X To activate: shift the selector lever to D.

X Pull gearshift paddle : or ;.
The short-term setting remains active for a
certain length of time. Under certain con-
ditions this minimum time is increased,
e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration,
during an overrun phase or while driving
on steep terrain.
X To deactivate: pull and hold gearshift
paddle ;.
or
X To activate: shift the selector lever to D. X Change the transmission position with
X Push the selector lever to the left. the selector lever.
or
X Change the drive program with the pro-
gram selector button.
Shifting with the selector lever
X To deactivate: push the selector lever to

the right.
X To shift up: push the selector lever in the The automatic transmission automati-
q direction. cally shifts up in order to prevent dam-
The automatic transmission shifts up to age to the engine:

the next gear. Rwhen the maximum engine speed of the
The automatic transmission automati- currently engaged gear has been
cally shifts up in order to prevent dam- reached and
age to the engine: Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Rwhen the maximum engine speed of the X To shift down: pull gearshift paddle :.
currently engaged gear has been The automatic transmission shifts down
reached and to the next gear.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Downshifting occurs automatically while
X To shift down: pull the selector lever in coasting.
the ± direction. If the engine exceeds the maximum
The automatic transmission shifts down engine speed when shifting down, the
to the next gear. automatic transmission protects against
Downshifting occurs automatically while engine damage by not shifting down.
coasting.
If the engine exceeds the maximum Gearshift recommendation
engine speed when shifting down, the
The gearshift recommendations assist you
automatic transmission protects against
in adopting an economical driving style.
engine damage by not shifting down.
Shifting with gearshift paddles (vehi-

cles with Sports package)
Vehicles with a monochrome display
X To shift up: pull gearshift paddle ;.

The automatic transmission shifts up to
the next gear.
Z
X Shift one gear up or down according to

gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Further information on the transmission
display:
RVehicles with a monochrome display
(Y page 157)
RVehicles with a colour display
(Y page 159)
Kickdown
If you want maximum acceleration, you can
also change the kickdown to be manually
switched on:
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
i If you apply full throttle, the automatic
transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
gear. workshop immediately.
The acceleration The transmission is in emergency mode.

ability is deteriorat- X Stop.
ing. X Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission no X Switch off the engine.
longer shifts into all
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
of the gears.
X Shift the transmission to position D.
Reverse gear can no
longer be engaged. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Manually releasing the selector lever X Apply the parking brake.

lock X Prise out cover : at lower edge ; with
You can manually release the selector level a flat, blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver
lock in the event of an electrical malfunc- wrapped in cloth).
X Pull cover : in the direction of the
tion. This is the case, for example, when
you want to release the parking brake while arrow.
towing away the vehicle and then apply it
again.
! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to
prise out the cover from the centre con-
sole. Otherwise, the cover or the centre
console could be damaged.
X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up

and simultaneously press release but-
ton ? on the selector lever.
X Shift the selector lever to N or P.
Z
136 Refuelling
Refuelling ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles

with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the
Important safety notes ignition if you accidentally refuel with
G WARNING the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will

enter the fuel system. Even small amounts
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
of the wrong fuel can result in damage to
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
the fuel system and the engine. Notify a
explosion.
qualified specialist workshop and have
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine pletely.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
before refuelling. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage
the fuel system.
G WARNING ! Take care not to spill any fuel on pain-
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to ted surfaces. You could otherwise damage
health. There is a danger of injury. the paintwork.
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into con- ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injec-
inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the tion system could otherwise be blocked
reach of children. by particles from the fuel can.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may
observe the following:
spray out when you remove the fuel pump
RWash the fuel off any affected areas of nozzle.
skin with water and soap immediately. For further information on fuel and fuel
RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them quality (Y page 269).
thoroughly with clean water immedi-
ately. Seek immediate medical atten-
tion. Refuelling
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate
medical attention. Do not induce vomit- General notes
ing. The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
RChange any clothing that has come into automatically when you lock or unlock the
contact with fuel immediately. vehicle with the key.
The position of the fuel filler cap is dis-
G WARNING played 8 in the instrument cluster. The
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and arrow next to the filling pump indicates
thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk the side of the vehicle.
of fire and explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before open-
ing the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel
pump nozzle. This discharges any electro-
static charge that may have built up.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the

refuelling process. Otherwise, electro-
static charge could build up again.
Refuelling 137
Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap
; To attach the fuel filler cap
= Fuel type instruction label
X Switch off the engine.
X Open the fuel filler flap in the direction
of arrow :.
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise
and remove it.
X Hang the fuel filler cap on the hook on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the
fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in
place and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Other-
wise, fuel may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the fuel filler cap on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before lock-

ing the vehicle.
Z
138 Parking
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
the vehicle.
G WARNING
There is a risk of fire or explosion.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
immediately (Y page 121).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 69).
The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the key element in the emergency
lock (Y page 74).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
Parking G WARNING
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Rrelease the parking brake
twigs may ignite if they come into contact Rshift the automatic transmission out of
with hot parts of the exhaust system or park position P or shift manual trans-
exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. mission into neutral
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Rstart the engine
rial can come into contact with hot vehicle
In addition, they may operate vehicle
components. In particular, do not park on
equipment and become trapped. There is a
dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
risk of an accident and injury.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly

against rolling away. Otherwise, the
vehicle or its drivetrain could be dam-
aged.
Parking 139
To ensure that the vehicle is secured Parking brake

against rolling away unintentionally:
General notes
Rthe parking brake must be applied.

Ra gear must be engaged on vehicles with G WARNING
manual transmission. If you must brake the vehicle with the park-
Rthe selector lever must be in position P ing brake, the braking distance is consid-
on vehicles with automatic transmis- erably longer and the wheels could lock.
sion. This increases the risk of skidding and an
Rthe key must be removed from the igni- accident.
tion lock. Only use the parking brake to brake the
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
front wheels must be turned towards the not apply the parking brake too firmly. If
kerb. the wheels lock, release the parking brake
until the wheels begin turning again.
Switching off the engine G WARNING

Important safety notes vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
The automatic transmission switches to Rrelease the parking brake
neutral position N when you switch off the Rshift the automatic transmission out of
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is park position P or shift manual trans-
a risk of an accident. mission into neutral
After switching off the engine, always Rstart the engine
switch to parking position P. Prevent the In addition, they may operate vehicle
parked vehicle from rolling away by apply- equipment and become trapped. There is a
ing the parking brake. risk of an accident and injury.
Vehicles with manual transmission key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Select a gear.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition The brake lights do not light up when you
lock and remove it. brake the vehicle with the parking brake.
The immobiliser is activated.
X Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission

X Shift the transmission to position P.
lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
Z
140 Driving tips
X To apply: firmly pull parking brake ; This could affect, for example, the power
upwards. steering and the brake boosting effect. You
The J indicator lamp in the instru- will require considerably more effort to
ment cluster lights up if the engine is steer and brake. There is a risk of an acci-
running. dent.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and Do not switch off the ignition while driv-
keep it depressed. ing.
X Press release button : on parking
brake ; and guide the parking brake Drive sensibly – save fuel
down to the stop.
The J indicator lamp in the instru- Observe the following tips to save fuel:
ment cluster goes out. RThe tyres should always be inflated to the
recommended tyre pressure.
The parking brake is not yet engaged if:
RRemove unnecessary loads.
Ra warning tone sounds
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Rthe Release parking brake message
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
appears in the multifunction display
RHave all maintenance work carried out as
(vehicles with colour display) and
Rthe J indicator lamp in the instru-
indicated by the service intervals in the
Service Booklet or by the service inter-
ment cluster lights up
val display.
Fuel consumption also increases when
Parking up the vehicle driving in cold weather, in stop-start
traffic and in hilly terrain.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for lon-
ger than four weeks, the battery may be
damaged by exhaustive discharging. eco score
If you leave the vehicle parked up for lon-
ger than six weeks, it may suffer from lack
General notes
of use. The eco score display provides feedback on
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop how economical your driving characteris-
and seek advice. tics are. The eco score display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving
i You can obtain information about style for the selected settings and pre-
trickle chargers from a qualified spe- vailing conditions. Consumption can be
cialist workshop. significantly influenced by your driving
style.
In addition to driving style, the consump-
Driving tips tion is affected by many other factors, such
General notes as:
Rload
Important safety notes Rtyre pressure
G WARNING Rcold start
If you switch off the ignition while driv- Rchoice of route
ing, safety-relevant functions are only Rthe use of electrical consumers
available with limitations, or not at all.
Driving tips 141
These factors are not included in the eco from the start of the journey to its com-
score display. pletion. Therefore, there are dynamic
changes in the percentage count at the
start of a journey. During a prolonged

driving time, these changes are smaller.
For dynamic changes, perform a manual
reset (Y page 161).
When the fuel level reaches the reserve
range, the remaining fuel storage is shown
in the multifunction display instead of the
percentage value.
For further information on the eco score
display, see (Y page 161).

The percentage count in eco score dis-
play : only appears after a distance of
approx. 400 m has been covered. A higher
percentage count indicates a more econom-
ical driving style. If the ignition remains
switched off for longer than 4 hours, eco
score display : in the on-board computer
will be automatically reset. Vehicles with manual transmission
i An economical driving style involves
driving with a moderate engine speed.
To achieve a higher value:
Robserve the gearshift recommendation
Raccelerate moderately, especially at
higher speeds
Rdrive carefully and keep your distance Vehicles with automatic transmission
from the vehicle in front
The percentage count in the eco score dis-
Rrelease the accelerator pedal in good
play only appears after a distance of
time approx. 400 m has been covered. A higher
Rallow the vehicle to coast without the percentage count indicates a more econom-
use of the brakes and engage neutral if ical driving style. If the ignition remains
necessary switched off for longer than 4 hours, the eco
Rdrive at a constant speed and avoid score display in the on-board computer
unnecessary acceleration and decel- will be automatically reset.
eration
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E
(vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion).
i The eco score calculation takes into
account your driving characteristics
Z
142 Driving tips
Vehicles with manual transmission: the An economical driving style involves driv-
percentage count in the eco score display ing with a moderate engine speed.
is an average value based on the following Vehicles with manual transmission: to
three categories: achieve a higher value in the shift cate-

Raccelerate (evaluation of all accelera- gory, observe the gearshift recommenda-
tion processes) tions.
- The bar fills up: moderate accelera- i On long journeys at a constant speed,
tion, especially at higher speeds e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration anticipatory will change.
Ranticipatory (assessment of driving
i The eco score calculation takes into
behaviour at all times) account your driving characteristics
- The bar fills up: keep your distance, from the start of the journey to its com-
release the accelerator early and allow pletion. Therefore, there are dynamic
the vehicle to coast without using the changes in the bars at the start of a jour-
brakes. Maintain a constant speed and ney. During a prolonged driving time,
avoid unnecessary acceleration and these changes are smaller. For dynamic
deceleration changes, perform a manual reset
- The bar empties: fluctuations in (Y page 161).
speed, frequent braking If you reset the data in the eco score dis-
Rshift (evaluation of all gear changes) play, then the data in the from start
- The bar fills up: observe the gearshift trip computer is also reset automati-
recommendations in the multifunction cally (Y page 160).
display For further information on the eco score
- The bar empties: driving with the display, see (Y page 161).
engine speed too high or too low
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
percentage count in the eco score display Braking
is an average value based on the following Important safety notes
two categories:
Raccelerate (evaluation of all accelera- G WARNING
tion processes) If you shift down on a slippery road surface
- The bar fills up: moderate accelera- in an attempt to increase the engine's
tion, especially at higher speeds braking effect, the drive wheels could lose
their grip. This increases the risk of skid-
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
ding and having an accident.
Ranticipatory (assessment of driving
Do not shift down for additional engine
behaviour at all times) braking on a slippery road surface.
- The bar fills up: keep your distance,
release the accelerator early and allow
Downhill gradients
the vehicle to coast without using the
brakes. Maintain a constant speed and Change into a lower gear in good time on
avoid unnecessary acceleration and long and steep downhill gradients. Take
deceleration particular note of this when driving a
- The bar empties: fluctuations in laden vehicle.
speed, frequent braking
Driving tips 143
i This also applies if you have activated After driving on a wet road or having the
cruise control or the speed limiter. vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
This will use the braking effect of the attention to the traffic conditions. This
will warm up the brake discs, thereby dry-

engine, so less braking will be required to
prevent the vehicle from gaining speed. ing them more quickly and protecting them
This relieves the load on the brake system against corrosion.
and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly. Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
Heavy and light loads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer
of salt may form on the brake discs and
G WARNING pads. This can increase the braking dis-
The braking system can overheat if you tance considerably.
leave your foot on the brake pedal while RBrake occasionally to remove any salt
driving. This increases the braking dis-
that may have started to build up. Ensure
tance and could even cause the braking sys-
that you do not endanger other road users
tem to fail. There is a risk of an accident.
when doing so.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the
not simultaneously depress both the brake
end of the journey and when starting the
pedal and the accelerator pedal while driv-
next journey.
ing.
RMaintain a much greater distance to the
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly vehicle in front.

results in excessive and premature wear
to the brake pads. New brake pads/linings
If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do New or replaced brake pads/linings and
not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on discs only reach their optimum braking
for a short while. This allows the airflow to effect after several hundred kilometres of
cool the brakes more quickly. driving. Compensate for the reduced brak-
If the brakes have been used only moder- ing effect by applying greater force to the
ately, you should occasionally test their brake pedal.
effectiveness. To do this, brake more When having brake pads/linings fitted,
firmly from a higher speed, paying atten- smart recommends that for safety reasons
tion to traffic conditions. This improves you only use those which are approved for
the grip of the brakes. smart vehicles or are of an equivalent
quality standard. Brake pads/linings
Wet road surfaces which have not been approved for smart
vehicles or which are not of an equivalent
If you have driven for a long time in heavy quality could affect your vehicle's oper-
rain without braking, there may be a ating safety.
delayed reaction from the brakes when
braking for the first time. This may also
occur after a car wash or after driving
through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from
the vehicle in front.
Z
144 Driving tips
Driving on wet roads their grip. This increases the risk of skid-
ding and having an accident.
Aquaplaning
Do not shift down for additional engine
If water has accumulated to a certain depth braking on a slippery road surface.

on the road surface, there is a danger of
aquaplaning occurring, even if: G DANGER
Ryou are driving at low speeds If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth ventilation is not possible, poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain
enter the vehicle. This is the case, for
or in conditions in which aquaplaning can
example, if the vehicle gets stuck in snow.
occur you must drive in the following man-
There is a risk of fatal injury.
ner:
If you have to leave the engine running,
Rlower your speed keep the exhaust pipe and the area around
Ravoid tyre ruts the vehicle free of snow. Open a window on
Ravoid sudden steering movements the leeward side of the vehicle to ensure an
Rbrake carefully adequate supply of fresh air.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a

Driving on flooded roads
qualified specialist workshop at the onset
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling of winter.
in front or in the opposite direction You should drive particularly carefully on
create waves. This may cause the maxi- slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden
mum permissible water depth to be acceleration, steering and braking
exceeded. manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control.
These notes must be observed under all If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
circumstances. You could otherwise dam- stopped when moving at low speed:
age the engine, the electronics or the
X Try to bring the vehicle under control by
transmission.
using corrective steering.
If you have to drive on stretches of road on X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
which water has collected, please bear in shift the transmission to position N.
mind that:
The outside temperature indicator is not
Rthe water level should not exceed the designed to serve as an ice-warning device
lower edge of the vehicle body in still and is therefore unsuitable for that pur-
water pose. Changes in the outside temperature
Ryou should drive no faster than walking
are displayed after a short delay.
pace Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may
Winter driving still be icy, especially in wooded areas or
G WARNING on bridges.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface You should pay special attention to road
in an attempt to increase the engine's conditions when temperatures are around
braking effect, the drive wheels could lose the freezing point.
Driving systems 145
For more information on driving with snow to lose traction and the vehicle could
chains, see (Y page 251). then skid
For more information on driving with sum- Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to

mer tyres, see (Y page 250). fog, heavy rain or snow
Observe the notes in the "Winter opera- If there is a change of drivers, advise the
tion" section (Y page 250). new driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control buttons

Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. Cruise control does not
brake the vehicle automatically. Only the
engine's braking effect is available. In
order to reduce speed and maintain dis-
tance to other road users, you need to brake
yourself. This cancels cruise control.
: Activates/deactivates cruise control
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
; Stores, increases or reduces the cur-
conditions make it appropriate to main-
rent speed
tain a steady speed for a prolonged period.
You can use cruise control at speeds above = Calls up the last speed stored
30 km/h. ? Interrupts cruise control
Important safety notes Activating cruise control

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Cruise control must be activated before it
cruise control can neither reduce the risk can be used.
of an accident nor override the laws of X Press switch : (V).
physics. Cruise control cannot take into Cruise control is activated.
account road, weather or traffic condi- The V symbol appears in the multi-
tions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are function display.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle
in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in i When you switch off the engine, cruise
good time, and for staying in lane. control remains activated and the last
Do not use cruise control: speed stored is cleared.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do
not allow you to maintain a constant Storing and maintaining the current
speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding speed
roads) When cruise control is active, you can save
Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or the current speed starting from 30 km/h.
accelerating can cause the drive wheels
Z
146 Driving systems
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired Increasing or decreasing the speed

speed.
In order to be able to increase or decrease
X Press switch ; (®) and release it.
the speed, a speed must already have been
X Remove your foot from the accelerator stored.

pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
automatically maintains the stored depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
speed. The stored speed appears beside ple, if you accelerate briefly to over-
the V icon in the multifunction dis- take, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's
speed to the last speed stored after you
play.
have finished overtaking.
i Cruise control may be unable to main- R®: increases the speed
tain the stored speed on uphill gradi- R−: decreases the speed
ents. The stored speed is resumed when
the gradient evens out. X Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly
On downhill gradients, only the engine's until the desired speed is reached.
braking effect is available. You have to The speed is gradually increased or
operate the brakes yourself to reduce reduced.
speed. This cancels cruise control. or
X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−)
Calling up the last speed stored until the desired speed is reached.
X Release the switch.
G WARNING
The new speed is stored.
If you call up the stored speed and this dif-
fers from your current speed, the vehicle
will accelerate. If you do not know the
Cancelling cruise control
stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate When cruise control is switched on, you can
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- cancel cruise control at any time and call
dent. up the stored speed again later.
Before you call up the stored speed, pay i The last speed stored is cleared when
attention to traffic conditions. If you do
you switch off the engine.
not know the stored speed, store the desired
speed again. X Press button ? ± and release it.
or
X Press button = ° and release it. X Brake
Cruise control is activated and adjusts Cruise control is cancelled.
the vehicle's speed to the last speed
stored. Cruise control is also cancelled when:
X Remove your foot from the accelerator Ryouengage the parking brake
pedal. Ryoudepress the clutch
Resp® intervenes
i The last speed stored is cleared when
Deactivating cruise control
X Press switch : so that the switch is set
to the middle position.
Cruise control is deactivated.
Driving systems 147
The V symbol goes out in the multi- Limiter buttons

function display.
i Once you have activated the limiter,

cruise control is deactivated.
Limiter
General notes
The limiter helps you to avoid exceeding a
set speed. The limiter does not brake the
vehicle automatically. On long and steep : Activates/deactivates the limiter
downhill gradients, especially if the vehi-
; Stores, increases or reduces the cur-
cle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear
rent speed
in time. By doing so, you will make use of
the braking effect of the engine. The lim- = Calls up the last speed stored
iter may be unable to prevent the stored ? Cancels the limiter
speed from being exceeded on downhill
gradients. In this case, the stored speed Activating the limiter
flashes in the display and a warning tone
The limiter must be activated before the
sounds. Brake yourself, if necessary, to
speed limiter can be used.
avoid exceeding the speed.
X Press (LIM) switch :.
Important safety notes The limiter is activated.

The È symbol appears in the multi-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the function display.
limiter can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics. i When you switch off the engine, the lim-
The limiter cannot take into account road, iter remains activated and the last speed
weather or traffic conditions. The limiter stored is cleared.
is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- Storing the speed
cle speed, for braking in good time, and for
staying in lane. When the limiter is active, you can store
any speed starting from 30 km/h.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the
new driver of the speed stored. You can save the current driving speed or
you can set any desired speed while the
Saving the current driving speed
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Press switch ; (®) and release it.
The limiter is activated. The stored
speed appears beside the È icon in
the multifunction display.
Z
148 Driving systems
Setting a speed while the vehicle is sta- Cancelling the limiter

tionary
When the limiter is activated, you can can-
X Press switch ; (®) and release it. cel it at any time and call up the stored
The limiter is activated. The stored speed again later.

speed appears beside the È icon in
i The last speed stored is cleared when
the multifunction display.
X Press button ± ? and release it.
Calling up the last speed stored
The limiter is cancelled.
X Press button = (°) and release it.
The limiter is activated. Deactivating the limiter
i The last speed stored is cleared when X Press the upper section of switch : so
you switch off the engine. that the switch is set in the middle posi-
tion.
Increasing or decreasing the speed The limiter is deactivated.
In order to be able to increase or decrease The È symbol goes out in the multi-
the speed, a speed must already have been function display.
stored.
R®: increases the speed
R−: decreases the speed Parking aid
X Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly General notes
until the desired speed is reached. The The rear parking aid indicates audibly the
speed is then gradually increased or distance between your vehicle and an
decreased. object. If you engage reverse gear when the
or engine is running, the parking aid is acti-
X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−) vated automatically.
until the desired speed is reached. The
speed will be increased or reduced in
10 km/h increments.
X Release the switch.
The new speed is stored.
Exceeding the stored speed

You can exceed the stored limit speed at
any time, if you depress the accelerator
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick-
down). When the maximum speed is excee- The parking aid monitors the rear area of
ded, the speed display flashes and a warn- your vehicle using three sensors : in the
ing tone sounds. The limiter is activated rear bumper. The sensors must be free of
again once the speed drops below the stored dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not
speed and kickdown is no longer active. function correctly. Clean the sensors reg-
ularly, taking care not to scratch or damage
them.
Driving systems 149
When reverse gear is engaged the system Deactivating/activating the parking aid
measures the distance between your vehi-
cle and an object. If the proximity to the
object behind the vehicle is less than

1.20 m, a beeping sound is issued. When the
object is a maximum of 30 cm away, a con-
tinuous tone is issued.

The parking aid is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the imme-
diate surroundings. The responsibility for
safe manoeuvring and parking remains X Press button ;.
with you. Make sure that there are no per- Indicator lamp : lights up. The system
sons, animals or objects in range while is deactivated.
manoeuvring and parking. X Press button ; again.
! When parking, pay particular attention Indicator lamp : goes out. The system is
to objects above or below the sensors, reactivated.
such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. i The parking aid is automatically acti-
The parking aid does not detect such vated when you start the engine.
objects when they are in the immediate
vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage If you engage reverse gear while the engine
the vehicle or the objects. is running, the parking aid is activated
The sensors may not detect snow and other automatically. An acoustic signal sounds
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. when reverse gear is selected.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic The parking aid is deactivated:
car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a Rwhen a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause Rreverse gear is no longer engaged
the parking aid to malfunction.
The parking aid may not function cor-
rectly on uneven terrain. Rear view camera
The parking aid does not take into account General notes
obstacles located:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g. over-
hanging loads, tail sections or loading
ramps of goods vehicles
Reversing camera : is an optical parking

and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area
Z
150 Driving systems
behind your vehicle with guide lines in the Activating/deactivating the reversing
smart Media-System display. camera
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as X To activate: make sure that the key is in
a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. position 2 in the ignition lock.

i The text shown in the smart Media-Sys- X Make sure that Reversing camera dis‐
tem display depends on the language set- play setting is selected in the smart
ting. The following are examples of Media-System (see separate operating
reversing camera displays. instructions).
X Engage reverse gear.
Important safety notes The area behind the vehicle is shown with
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is guide lines in the smart Media-System
not a substitute for your attention to the display.
immediate surroundings. The responsibil- To switch off: after driving forwards
ity for safe manoeuvring and parking briefly, the reversing camera will turn
remains with you. Make sure that there are itself off.
no persons, animals or objects in range
while manoeuvring and parking. Messages in the display
Under the following circumstances, the
The reversing camera may show a distorted
reversing camera will not function, or will
view of obstacles or show them incorrectly
function in a limited manner:
or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the
Rif the tailgate is open reversing camera in the following loca-
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog tions:
Rat night or in very dark places Rvery close to the rear bumper
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright Runder the rear bumper
light Rin the area immediately above the tail-
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or gate handle
LED lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in tempera-
! Objects not at ground level may appear
to be further away than they actually are,
ture, e.g. when driving into a heated
e.g.:
garage in winter
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
setting checked at a qualified special- Rthe rear section of an HGV
ist workshop Ra slanted post
The field of vision and other functions of Use the guidelines only for orientation.
the reversing camera may be restricted due Approach objects no further than the bot-
to additional accessories on the rear of the tom-most guideline.
vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle
rack).
Driving systems 151
This feature warns the driver if a lane

marking is crossed inadvertently. Lane
Keeping Assist uses a camera : which is

affixed on the windscreen behind the rear
view mirror.
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. The corre-
sponding symbol flashes for a maximum of
five seconds in the display and a warning
tone sounds.
: Guide line without turning the steering
wheel, vehicle width including the Important safety notes
exterior mirrors (static) G WARNING
; Green guide line at a distance of Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
approximately 1.50 m from the rear of identify lane markings.
the vehicle
In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may:
= Yellow guide line at a distance of
Rgive an unnecessary warning
approximately 0.7 m from the rear of the
vehicle Rnot give a warning
? Red guide line at a distance of approx- There is a risk of an accident.
imately 0.3 m from the rear of the vehi- Always pay particular attention to the traf-
cle fic situation and keep in lane, especially
A Blue guide line for the vehicle width if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
including the exterior mirrors, for
current steering wheel angle (dynamic) G WARNING
The guide lines are shown when the trans- The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
mission is in position R. return the vehicle to the original lane.
The distance specifications only apply to There is a risk of an accident.
objects that are at ground level. Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler-
ate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane
Keeping Assist alerts you.
Lane Keeping Assist
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
General notes Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk
of an accident nor override the laws of
physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic con-
ditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
braking in good time, and for staying in
lane.
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your
vehicle in its lane.
Z
152 Driving systems
The system may be impaired or may not Vehicles with a colour display:
function if: X To switch on: press button ;.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to Indicator lamp : goes out. In the dis-
insufficient illumination of the road, or play, the Ã symbol and the Lane
due to snow, rain, fog or spray Keeping Assist on message appear.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traf- If you drive at speeds above 70 km/h and
fic, the sun or reflection from other lane markings are detected, Lane Keep-
vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) ing Assist is operational. The Ã sym-
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam- bol appears in the display with a green
aged or covered, for instance by a background.
sticker, in the vicinity of the camera X To deactivate: press button ;.
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are Indicator lamp : lights up. The Ã
present for one lane, e.g. in a construc- symbol in the display goes out. Lane
tion area Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or Keeping Assist off message appears in
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow the display.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot
X To switch on: press the ; button.
be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Ã
symbol appears in the display.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge If you drive at speeds above 70 km/h and
Rthe road is narrow and winding
lane markings are detected, Lane Keep-
ing Assist is operational. The ¤ sym-
Rthere are highly variable shade condi-
bol appears in the display.
tions on the road
X To deactivate: press button ;.
No warning occurs if:
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Ã
Ra lane marking is crossed at speed symbol in the display goes out. Lane
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In Keeping Assist is deactivated.
this case, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time i Your selection remains stored when you
switch off the engine.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist
153
>> On-board computer and displays.

Important safety notes ...................... 154
Displays and operation ..................... 154
Menus and submenus .......................... 160
Display messages (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .................. 168
Display messages (on-board computer
with colour display) ......................... 173
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ........................... 190
154
>> On-board computer and displays. Displays and operation
Useful information fore make sure your vehicle is operating

safely at all times. Otherwise, you may
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- cause an accident by driving a vehicle that
els, series and optional equipment for is not operating reliably.
your vehicle that were available at the If the operating safety of your vehicle is
time of going to press. Country-specific impaired, park the vehicle as soon as pos-
differences are possible. Note that your sible, paying attention to road and traffic
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- conditions. Contact a qualified specialist
tures described. This is also the case for workshop.
systems and functions relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the overview of warn-
i Read the information on qualified spe- ing and indicator lamps in the instrument
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). cluster:
ROn-board computer with a black and
white display (Y page 28)
Important safety notes ROn-board computer with a colour display
(Y page 30)
G WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communications equipment in the Displays and operation
vehicle while driving will distract you
Instrument cluster lighting
from traffic conditions. You could then
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk Instrument cluster lighting includes illu-
of an accident. mination of the instrument cluster, the
Only operate these devices if road traffic additional instruments on the dashboard,
conditions permit. If you are unsure about the displays and the controls.
the surrounding conditions, pull over to a The instrument cluster lighting is
safe location and make entries only while switched automatically between day and
the vehicle is stationary. night lighting depending on the ambient
light conditions (Y page 93).
You must observe the legal requirements On vehicles with a colour display, you can
for the country in which you are currently also set the brightness of the instrument
driving when operating the on-board com- cluster lighting to different levels in the
puter. on-board computer (Y page 164).
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
Speedometer
functioned, you may not recognise function
restrictions relevant to safety. The oper- If you turn the key to position 2 in the
ating safety of your vehicle may be ignition lock, the warning and indicator
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. lamps in the instrument cluster will
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle briefly light up for a lamp test. During the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop lamp test, the illuminated speedometer
immediately. needle moves in the speedometer.
The on-board computer with a colour dis-
The on-board computer only shows display play can show a digital speedometer in the
messages and/or warnings from certain display. The digital speedometer can be
systems in the display. You should there-
Displays and operation 155

hidden/displayed and its speed unit Fuel gauge
selected (Y page 165).
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature
display indicates the temperature meas-
ured and does not record the road temper-
ature.
Fuel level indicator (example: monochrome dis-
The display shows the outside temperature play)
on the far right in the header:
Rmonochrome display (Y page 157)
Rcolour display (Y page 159)
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
If the outside temperature has fallen below
3 †, the Ò symbol is shown beside the
outside temperature display.
At outside temperatures between -3 † and
3 †:
Rthe Ò symbol flashes for about Fuel level indicator (example: colour display)
1 minute in the black and white display : Reserve fuel display
and then remains on continuously ; Fuel gauge
Rthe colour display also shows a display = Fuel filler flap location indicator
message next to the Ò symbol u The fuel filler cap is located on
(Y page 179) the right
For an on-board computer with colour dis- ? 6 Reserve fuel (yellow)
play, you can set the temperature unit of the
outside temperature display (Y page 166). Fuel gauge ; is shown in the display as a
segment display with eight segments.
When the fuel level falls below the reserve
range of 5.0 l, the last illuminated segment
of the fuel display will flash and a warning
tone will sound. Reserve fuel display :
will also appear. The reserve fuel display
shows the numeric value of the remaining
fuel level in 0.5 l increments.
With a colour display:
R6 symbol ? also appears in yellow
Ra display message is also shown
(Y page 181).
Z
156
Additional instruments on the dash- On-board computer with a monochrome

board display
Operating the on-board computer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range.

Doing so will damage the engine.
Avoid excessive engine speeds. This
unnecessarily increases the fuel consump-
tion of your vehicle and harms the envi-
ronment as a result of increased emissions. : Monochrome display
; Buttons on the multifunction lever
The overrevving range of the engine is
X To activate the on-board computer:
shown with dashed lines in the orange
unlock the vehicle and open a door.
marking of rev counter :. The fuel supply
If you do not subsequently lock the door,
is interrupted to protect the engine when
the on-board computer will remain
the overrevving range is reached.
active for approximately 15 minutes
Dashboard clock ; is synchronised with without any further activity.
the clock in the on-board computer.
or
Rev counter :, together with dashboard X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
clock ;, can be rotated approximately 60°
lock.
on the dashboard.
For vehicles with a colour display, you can You can control the display and the settings
also set the brightness of the instrument in the on-board computer using buttons ;
cluster lighting to different levels on the multifunction lever.
(Y page 164).

Buttons ; on the multifunction lever Current fuel consumption (Y page 158)
Service display (Y page 218)
´ Press briefly:
B Restarts the tyre pressure monitor
RTo scroll forward at menu level
(Y page 254)
RTo gradually increase the C 6 Fuel level (Y page 155)
value in the sub-menus D eco score display (Y page 140)
Press and hold: Reserve fuel display (Y page 155)
RTo switch directly to the trip E b Brake lamp failure warning lamp
meter at menu level (Y page 168)
RTo quickly increase the value F Total distance recorder
in the sub-menus G V Cruise control (Y page 145)
a Press briefly: È Limiter
RTo confirm the setting in the Vehicles with automatic transmission
sub-menu
Press and hold:
RTo reset the value at menu level
or call up the sub-menu
Monochrome display
Vehicles with manual transmission
: Time (Y page 158)

; Drive program (Y page 129)
= u Gearshift recommendation
(Y page 128)
? Transmission display
h Standard display or
= Gear indicator (manual mode)
: Time (Y page 158) S Transmission malfunction
(Y page 170)
; Transmission display
A ¤ Lane Keeping Assist indicator
u Gearshift recommendation
lamp (Y page 151)
(Y page 128)
B Outside temperature display
¿ Standard display
(Y page 155)
S Transmission malfunction C Trip meter (Y page 158)
(Y page 170)
Current fuel consumption (Y page 158)
= ¤ Lane Keeping Assist indicator
Service display (Y page 218)
lamp (Y page 151)
D Restarts the tyre pressure monitor
? Outside temperature display
(Y page 254)
(Y page 155)
E 6 Fuel level (Y page 155)
A Trip meter (Y page 158)
Z
158
F eco score display (Y page 140) shows the trip meter data or the current
Reserve fuel display (Y page 155) fuel consumption.
X Press and hold the b button on the
G b Brake lamp failure warning lamp
(Y page 168) multifunction lever.
H Total distance recorder The trip meter value or the eco score
display flashes for approx. 3 seconds.
I V Cruise control (Y page 145)
The data is then reset.
È Limiter The count in the eco score display only
reappears once a distance of approx.
Menus and multi-displays 400 m has been covered. If the ignition
remains switched off for longer than four
Overview
hours, the eco score display in the on-
The arrangement of the menus and displays board computer will be automatically
can be envisaged as a circle. reset.
X To scroll: repeatedly press the ´ but- X When the value has been reset, release
ton on the multifunction lever. the b button.
The menu functions/displays are shown If you release the b button earlier,
one after the other. the data shown will not change.
i If the ´ button is pressed and held
for approximately 3 seconds, the trip Current fuel consumption
meter appears directly on the display. When the vehicle is stationary or up to a
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display
can call up the following menus/displays shows the current fuel consumption as a
one after the other: numeric value in l/h.
Rdisplay and reset the trip meter Setting the time
(Y page 158) X Repeatedly press the ´ button on the
Rdisplay the current fuel consumption multifunction lever until the display
(Y page 158) shows the ° symbol alongside the
Rdisplay the service due date time.
(Y page 218) X Press and hold the b button on the
Rset the time menu (Y page 158) multifunction lever until the hour value
Rrestart the tyre pressure monitor flashes.
(Y page 254) X Press ´ to set the hour and confirm
the selection with b.
Resetting values The minute value flashes.
You can reset the trip meter data and the X Press ´ to set the minutes and b to
eco score display (Y page 140). You can only
confirm the selection.
reset the eco score if the display is show-
The display will show the time selected.
ing the current fuel consumption.
X Repeatedly press the ´ button on the i If the ´ button on the multifunction
multifunction lever until the display lever is pressed and held when setting
the time, the numerical values will
change continuously.

On-board computer with a colour dis- Left control panel ;
play
9 Press briefly:
Operating the on-board computer : RTo scroll through a menu
RTo scroll through a sub-menu or
list
Press and hold:
RTo switch directly to the Dis‐
tance menu at menu level
RTo switch directly to the back
function at the submenu level
a RTo confirm the selection
RIn certain menus, to switch to
the Reset values? function
RTo hide the display message
Colour display
: Colour display
; Left control panel
X To activate the on-board computer:
unlock the vehicle and open a door.
If you do not subsequently lock the door,
the on-board computer will remain
active for approximately 15 minutes
without any further activity.
or
: Time (Y page 163)
lock.
; Ã Lane Keeping Assist indicator
You can control the display and the settings lamp (Y page 151)
in the on-board computer using the steer- = Digital speedometer (Y page 165)
ing wheel buttons on left control panel ;.
? Outside temperature display
(Y page 155)
A Display field for display messages,
menus and lists
B 6 Reserve fuel display (Y page 155)
C 6 Fuel level (Y page 155)
D Transmission display
Vehicles with manual transmission:
¿ Standard display
Z
160
>> On-board computer and displays. Menus and submenus
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Odometer menu

h Standard display with drive pro-
gram or = Gear indicator (manual
mode)
u Gearshift recommendation
(Y page 128)
S Transmission malfunction
(Y page 189)
E V Cruise control (Y page 145) Example: distance
È Limiter X To show: press the 9 or : button on
the steering wheel to select the trip
meter display.
Menus and submenus The display shows trip meter : and total
distance recorder ;.
Menu overview
X To reset the data: press the a button
The arrangement of the menus and displays on the steering wheel.
can be envisaged as a circle. X Press the 9 or : button to select
At the menu level, a segment display is yes and press the a button to confirm.
shown on the right side of the display to The trip meter is reset.
help navigation. The segment marked cor-
responds with the list position of the menu You can change the unit for the trip meter
in the following list. For long lists within in the Display submenu (Y page 165).
the menus and submenus, a scroll bar on the
right side of the display serves to assist
orientation. Trip computer menu "From start" or
"From reset"
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 159).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can call up the following menus one after
the other:
RDistance menu (Y page 160)
Rfrom start trip computer menu
(Y page 160) Example: trip computer "From start"
Rfrom reset trip computer menu : Elapsed time
(Y page 160) ; Distance
Reco score from start menu = Average speed
(Y page 161) ? Average fuel consumption
RFuel consumption menu (Y page 162)
X To display: press the 9 or : button
RCoolant temperature menu on the steering wheel to select the from
(Y page 162) start or from reset trip computer
RMessages and service menu menu.
(Y page 162) If you reset the data in the from start trip
RSettings menu (Y page 163)
computer, the eco score display in the on-
Menus and submenus 161

board computer is also reset automatically eco score from start menu
(Y page 161).
Vehicles with a smart Media-System: if you
reset the data in the from reset trip com-
puter, the eco score display in the smart
Media-System will also be reset automat-
ically (see the separate operating instruc-
tions).
X To reset the data: press the a button eco score display (vehicles with manual trans-
on the steering wheel. mission)
X Press the 9 or : button to select
yes and press the a button to confirm.
The display shows the trip computer and
the data shown is reset.
The average speed and average fuel con-
sumption are only displayed again once a
distance of approx. 400 m has been cov-
eco score display (vehicles with automatic
ered. transmission)
The data in the from start trip computer X To display: press the 9 or : button
menu refers to the start of the journey. The on the steering wheel to select the eco
data in the from reset trip computer sub- score from start menu.
menu refers to the last time the submenu
was reset. If you reset the data in the eco score dis-
play, then the data in the from start trip
The from start trip computer is automat-
computer is also reset automatically
ically reset when:
(Y page 160).
Rthe ignition has been switched off for
X To reset the data: press the a button
more than 4 hours
on the steering wheel.
R999 hours have been exceeded
R9999 kilometres have been exceeded
yes and press the a button to confirm.
The from reset trip computer is automat- The display shows the eco score display
ically reset if the value exceeds 9999 hours and the data shown is reset.
or 99,999 kilometres.
The percentage count in the eco score
The unit of distance for the journey, speed display only reappears once a distance
and consumption information can be of approx. 400 m has been covered.
changed in the Display submenu
(Y page 165). If the ignition remains switched off for
longer than 4 hours, the eco score display
in the on-board computer will be automat-
ically reset.
For further information on the eco score
display, see (Y page 140).
Z
162
Fuel consumption menu X Press the 9 or : button on the

steering wheel to select the coolant tem-
perature display.
The display shows the current coolant
temperature as a bar in the range
between 50 and 110 †.
If the coolant temperature rises above
110 †, then the display shows a display
Example: fuel consumption message (Y page 181). Observe the dis-
X
play message. You could otherwise dam-
Press the 9 or : button on the
age the engine.
steering wheel to select the display of
current fuel consumption. You can change the temperature unit in the
Display submenu (Y page 166).
The display shows the fuel consumption
over the previous 15 minutes as a bar chart.
The display additionally shows the current
Messages and service menu
fuel consumption as a numeric value in the
upper right section of the display.
When the vehicle is stationary or up to a
speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display
shows the current fuel consumption as a
numeric value in l/h. If you have changed
the unit of measurement for distance to
Miles, the display shows two dashes.
Example: messages and service
If you switch off the ignition, or change the
distance unit, the fuel consumption data is If you have hidden display messages these
deleted automatically. are saved in the message memory. The menu
shows the number of display messages in
You can change the distance unit in the
message memory : and next service due
Display submenu (Y page 165).
date ; (Y page 218). The message memory
can only be called up when the ignition is
Coolant temperature menu switched on.
X Press the 9 or : button on the
Under normal operating conditions and
steering wheel to select the Messages
with the specified coolant level, the cool-
and service menu.
ant temperature may rise to 110 †.
The display shows the number of display
messages in the message memory and the
next service due date.
If there are no display messages, then the
value in brackets is 0 and the informa-
tion on the a button is hidden.
X To show display messages: press the a
Example: coolant temperature button on the steering wheel.

The lower area on the right of the display
shows the display message, its list num-

ber and then number of display messages For vehicles with a smart media system,
in the message memory. the time is set using the smart media
X Press 9 to scroll through the display system.
messages in the message memory. - Setting the time and the time format
Pressing : only allows you to scroll (12/24 h)

back to messages which have already been RDisplay submenu (Y page 164)
read. - Adjusting the instrument cluster
If you scroll back from the first display lighting
message using :, the Messages and - Shows and sets the digital speedometer
service menu will again be shown in the - Setting the units for distance and tem-
display. Existing display messages are perature
not shown.
RAmbient lighting submenu
(Y page 166)
- Setting and switching the ambient
Settings menu
lighting on/off
Introduction RTyre pressure monitor submenu
- Restarts the tyre pressure monitor
(Y page 254)
RLanguage (Language) submenu
(Y page 166)
- Setting the menu language
The Settings menu and some submenus also
show the back function.
In the Settings menu, as well as in its sub-
menus, a navigation bar is also shown at the If the back function is shown, you have to
top of the display field. The navigation bar select the function to leave the menu.
serves for quick orientation and shows the X Press the 9 or : button on the
navigation path to the current selection steering wheel to select the back func-
shown in the display (submenu/function). tion and press a on the steering wheel
The selection shown in the display is high- to confirm.
lighted in the navigation path. You quit the menu and the display shows
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you the next higher menu level.
can call up the following submenus in the i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
Settings menu: change directly to the back function.
RTime submenu (Y page 163)
Time submenu
Introduction
This submenu is not available on vehicles
with a smart media system. You set the time
using the smart media system.
The Time submenu offers the following
options:
Rsetting the time
Rsetting the time format (12/24 h)
Z
164
XTo leave the submenu: press the 9 Display submenu

or : button on the steering wheel to
select the back function and press a Introduction
on the steering wheel to confirm. In the Display submenu, you can call up the
The display shows the Settings menu. following submenus:
RDisplay/switch brightness submenu
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function. (Y page 164)
- Adjusting the instrument cluster
Setting the time lighting
X Press the 9 or : button on the RDigital speedometer submenu, see
steering wheel to select the Settings (Y page 165)
menu and press a on the steering - Shows and sets the digital speedometer
wheel to confirm. RUnits of distance submenu
(Y page 165)
the Time submenu and confirm with a. - Setting the units of distance
RUnits of temperature submenu
Set the time and press the a button (Y page 166)
to confirm. - Setting the units of temperature
X Press the 9 or : button to set the
X To leave the submenu: press the 9
hour and confirm with a.
select the back function and press a
minutes and confirm with a. on the steering wheel to confirm.
The time is set and the display shows the The display shows the Settings menu.
Time submenu.
i If you are setting the time and keep the change directly to the back function.
9 or : button depressed, then the
Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting
numerical value changes continuously.
Instrument cluster lighting includes illu-
Setting the time format (12/24 h) mination of the instrument cluster, the
X Press the 9 or : button on the additional instruments on the dashboard,
steering wheel to select the Settings the displays and the controls.
menu and press a on the steering You can set the brightness of the instru-
wheel to confirm. ment cluster to different levels with the
X Press the 9 or : button to select Display/switch brightness function.
the Time submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button on the
X Press 9 or : to select Time for‐ steering wheel to select the Settings
mat (12/24 h) and confirm with a. menu and press a on the steering
X Press 9 or : to select the desired wheel to confirm.
time format 24 hour or 12 hour (am/pm) X Press the 9 or : button to select
and confirm with a. the Display submenu and confirm with
The time format is accepted and the dis- a.
play shows the Time submenu. X Press the 9 or : button to select
Display/switch brightness and press
the a button to confirm.

X Press the 9 or : button to set the XTo leave the submenu: press the 9
brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to or : button to select the back func-
dimmed instrument lighting and level 5 tion and confirm with a.
to bright instrument lighting. The display shows the Display submenu.
With the selection during night-time i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
driving, the instrument cluster bright- change directly to the back function.
ness level is set at the same time.
X Press the a button to confirm the set- Setting the unit of measurement for dis-
ting. tance
The instrument lighting is set and the If you change the unit of measurement for
display shows the Display submenu. distance, the values in the:
Rtrip computer "From start" or "From
Digital speedometer submenu reset" (Y page 160)
In the Digital speedometer submenu you Reco score from start (Y page 161)
have the following options: Rfuel consumption (Y page 162)
Rshowing/hiding the digital speedometer
menus are also reset automatically.
Rsetting the unit for speed in the digital
You can only set the unit of measurement for
speedometer
distance when the vehicle is stationary.
X To call up the submenu: press the 9
select the Settings menu and press a steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
on the steering wheel to confirm.
wheel to confirm.
the Display submenu and confirm with
a. the Display submenu and confirm with
a.
the Digital speedometer submenu and
confirm with a. Units of distance and press the a
button to confirm.
X To show/hide the digital speedometer: X Press the 9 or : button to select
press the 9 or : button to select Kilometres or Miles as the unit of meas-
the On function. urement for distance and press a to
X Activate or deactivate the On function by confirm.
pressing the a button. The display shows the Display submenu.
When the function is highlighted, it is
The selected unit of measurement for dis-
activated and the display shows the dig-
tance applies as the basis for:
ital speedometer (Y page 159).
Rthe trip computer
X To set the unit of speed: press the 9
or : button to select Unit and press Rthe service display
the a button to confirm. Rthe fuel consumption display
X Press the 9 or : button to select Rthe total distance recorder and the trip
the unit of speed km/h or mph and confirm meter display
with a. Rthe speed display for cruise control and
The display shows the Digital speed‐ the limiter
ometer submenu.
Z
166
Setting the temperature unit X Press the 9 or : button to select

You can switch the display of the outside the On function.
temperature and the coolant temperature X Activate or deactivate the On function by
between † and ‡. pressing the a button.
X Press the 9 or : button on the When the function is highlighted it is
steering wheel to select the Settings activated and the ambient lighting is
menu and press a on the steering switched on.
wheel to confirm. Setting the brightness
You can set the brightness of the ambient
the Display submenu and confirm with lighting to different levels.
a.
steering wheel to select the Settings
Units of temperature and press the
a button to confirm.
wheel to confirm.
the unit of temperature °C or °F and con-
the Ambient lighting submenu and con-
firm with a.
firm by pressing the a button.
The display shows the Display submenu.
You will see the selected setting.
Ambient lighting submenu Brightness and press the a button to
Introduction confirm.
In the Ambient lighting submenu you have
the following options: brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to
Rswitching the ambient lighting on/off
dimmed ambient lighting and level 5 to
bright ambient lighting.
Rsetting the brightness of the ambient
With the selection, the ambient lighting
lighting to different levels brightness level is set at the same time.
X To leave the submenu: press the 9 X Press the a button to save the setting.
or : button on the steering wheel to The brightness of the ambient lighting
select the back function and press a is set and the display shows the Ambient
on the steering wheel to confirm. lighting submenu.
The display shows the Settings menu.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you Language submenu
change directly to the back function.
Switching the ambient lighting on/off steering wheel to select the Settings
X Press the 9 or : button on the menu and press a on the steering
steering wheel to select the Settings wheel to confirm.
menu and press a on the steering X Use 9 or : to select the Language
wheel to confirm. (Language) submenu and confirm with
X Press the 9 or : button to select a.
the Ambient lighting submenu and con- X Press the 9 or : button to select
firm by pressing the a button. the desired language for the displays
and messages and confirm with a.

XPress the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the back func-
tion and press a on the steering wheel
to confirm.
The display shows the Settings menu in
the selected language.
change directly to the back function.
Z
168
>> On-board computer and displays. Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)

Introduction
Warnings, malfunctions or additional information are shown in the monochrome display
as symbols. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may
differ from the symbols in the display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes
in this Owner's Manual. The cause of a display message should be remedied as soon as
possible.
Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b The symbol lights up.

The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the
bulbs or LEDs are faulty.
G WARNING
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The
brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when
braking.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 138).
A Vehicles with manual transmission only: letter N flashes in the

middle of the display.
You are trying to start the engine, a gear is engaged and the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
To start the engine:
X Engage neutral. (Y page 127)
or
If the engine fails to start despite the clutch pedal being fully
depressed, then the clutch sensor is malfunctioning.
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display) 169

Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N
flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A
warning tone also sounds.
The parking lock is malfunctioning.
X Apply the parking brake to park.
AorB Vehicles with automatic transmission only: P or N flash alter-

nately in the middle of the display.
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position D or R.
X Shift to P or N to start.
Aor7/ Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N flashes alter-

nately with the currently selected transmission position in
C the middle of the display.
The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion.
X Shift to N to start.
ì Vehicles with automatic transmission only: B flashes for 15

seconds in the middle of the display.
You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Bor7/ Vehicles with automatic transmission only: P flashes alter-

nately with the currently selected transmission position. A
C,A warning tone also sounds.
The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is
in position R, N or D.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
X Fully close the driver's door.
Z
170
S Vehicles with manual transmission only: the transmission

display shows three lines.
The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the idling
sensor is faulty.
The Start/Stop function and cruise control are deactivated
automatically.
Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully
depressed.
S Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the transmission

display shows three lines.
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
SorB/ Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes

alternately with the currently selected transmission position.
7/C/ The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will
A feel the clutch pedal pulsate.
X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres.
If the display message disappears, automatic transmission
is available again.
SorB/ Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes

7/C/ A warning tone also sounds.
A Further pulling away or crawling manoeuvres have led to a
critical clutch temperature.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and
the display message does not reappear after acknowledging
it.
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display) 171

¤ The symbol flashes for a maximum of 5 seconds and in addition

a warning tone sounds.
Lane Keeping Assist warning
You are crossing a detected outer lane marking without indi-
cating.
X Remain in lane, paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions.
or
X Indicate to change lane.
Ã The symbol flashes for about 3 seconds and in addition a warn-

ing tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden.
Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning and deactivated. Pos-
sible causes:
Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or
snow
Rthe system electronics are faulty
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when

the causes mentioned above no longer apply.
If the windscreen is dirty:
X Clean the outside of the windscreen (Y page 222).
If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed above do not

apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning.
°h The symbols flash for about 5 seconds. The symbols then both
remain lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is restarted (Y page 254).
È The symbol lights up without the speed display.

The limiter has been activated without a speed being entered
or has been cancelled.
X Set a limit speed .
Z
172
È The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A

The limiter is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically.
È The symbol lights up and the speed display flashes. A warning

tone also sounds.
The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed.
X If required, brake the vehicle paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
V The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A

In addition, the \ door warning lamp and other warning
lamps, e.g. ÷, light up.
The central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are
malfunctioning.
After the engine is switched off:
Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func-
tion of the key
Ryou can no longer start the engine

paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con-
tinue driving under any circumstances.
V The symbol lights up without the speed display.

Cruise control has been activated without a speed being
entered or has been cancelled.
X Set a speed (Y page 145).
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 173

V The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A

Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automati-
cally.
Ò The outside temperature has fallen to 3 † or lower. The symbol

flashes for about 1 minute. The road surface may be icy.
If the outside temperature falls to a level under -3 †, the
symbol does not flash but rather remains on continuously.
X Observe the information on the outside temperature display
(Y page 155).
X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather con-
ditions.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

Introduction
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may
differ from the symbols in the display. The display shows high-priority messages in red.
For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes
in this Owner's Manual.
You can use the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to hide low-priority
messages. The display messages are stored in the message memory and can be called up as
for as long as the ignition remains switched on (Y page 162). When the ignition is turned
off, the message memory is deleted and no display messages are stored. The cause of a
display message should be remedied as soon as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these
messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Z
174
>> On-board computer and displays. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
Safety systems
6 The restraint system is faulty.
Malfunction Visit G WARNING

workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
gered.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 38).
Electronics mal‐ In addition, the ÷, ! and J warning lamps light up in

function Stop See the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
Owner's Manual ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) are malfunctioning. This means that Crosswind
Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could
therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit-
uation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied.

X Release the parking brake.
Release parking
brake

Brake force distri‐ In addition, the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster
bution inoperative lights up and a warning tone sounds.
Stop See Owner's EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind
Manual Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
G WARNING
the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could
vehicle.
J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
Check brake fluid G WARNING

level The braking efficiency may be impaired.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the mal-
function.
Z
176
! ABS is malfunctioning. This means that ESP®, Crosswind Assist

and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
System inoperative
G WARNING
the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if
you brake hard, for example.
vehicle.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that

other systems may be unavailable.

÷ ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.

This means that Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for
System inoperative
example, are also unavailable.
G WARNING
the functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
thus increase.
The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer
working when braking.
vehicle.
X Check that the brake lamps are working.
If the brake lamps are not working:

If the brake lamps are working:
Hill start assist The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
inoperative ter.
Hill start assist is malfunctioning. If you release the brake,
your vehicle will not be held automatically when pulling away
uphill and may roll away immediately.
G WARNING
vehicle.
Z
178
^ The distance warning function is temporarily inoperative.

Possible causes:
Distance warning
Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty
inoperative
Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due
to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage goes out.
The distance warning function is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Clean the smart logo in the radiator trim (Y page 223).
X Restart the engine.

^ The distance warning function is malfunctioning or tempora-

rily inoperative. Possible causes:
Electronics mal‐
Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty
function Visit
workshop Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warn-

ing function is operational again.
If the display message continues to light up, the electronics of
the distance warning function are malfunctioning.
Ò The outside temperature has fallen to 3 † or lower. The road

surface may be icy.
Black ice warning
If the outside temperature sinks below -3 †, the colour display
only shows the Ò symbol beside the outside temperature
display.
X Observe the information on the outside temperature display
(Y page 155).
X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather con-
ditions.
Engine
; The engine is running in emergency mode. For example, the

fuel injection may be faulty.
Reduced power See
Owner's Manual
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
í The battery monitoring is malfunctioning.

Malfunction Visit
workshop
Z
180
í The battery is not being charged.

Possible causes:
Stop See Owner's
Manual Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and

traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over-
heat.
5 The oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.

Stop Switch off
engine
X Check the oil level (Y page 214).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 215).
Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from

any qualified specialist workshop.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 110 †. The airflow to the

engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
Stop Switch off low.
engine
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be dam-
aged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your
engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns,
which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the
notes as you do so (Y page 272).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature
is below 110 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
6 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
Low fuel level
Z
182
Driving systems
Ã The Ã symbol in the top bar of the display also flashes white
for approximately 3 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The
Lane Keeping symbol is then hidden.
Assist inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning and deactivated. Pos-
sible causes:
Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or
snow
Rthe system electronics are faulty
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when

the causes mentioned above no longer apply.
If the windscreen is dirty:
X Clean the outside of the windscreen (Y page 222).
If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed above do not

apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning.
Ã The symbol in the top bar of the display flashes green for a
maximum of 5 seconds and a warning tone sounds.
Lane Keeping Assist warning
You are crossing a detected outer lane marking without indi-
cating.
X Remain in lane, paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions.
or
X Indicate to change lane.
For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see

(Y page 151).
È The È symbol in the display footer also flashes for approx-

imately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is
Limiter inopera‐ then hidden.
tive
The limiter is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically.

È The symbol in the footer of the display is lit and the speed
display flashes. A warning tone also sounds.
The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed.
X If required, brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
È The symbol in the footer of the display is lit without a speed

display.
The limiter has been activated without a speed being entered
or has been cancelled.
X Set a limit speed .
V The V symbol in the display footer also flashes for approx-

imately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is
Cruise control then hidden.
inoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automati-
cally.
V The symbol in the footer of the display is lit without a speed

display.
Cruise control has been activated without a speed being
entered or has been cancelled.
X Set a speed (Y page 145).
Z
184
Tyres
h The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.
Tyre pressure Cau‐ G WARNING

tion tyre malfunc‐ If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following
tion hazards:
Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat
build-up and possibly a fire
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or
braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions
as you do so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for
a flat tyre (Y page 229).
h The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restar-

ted after a wheel change.
Tyre pressure mon‐
itor inoperative G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change
(Y page 254)
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after
driving for a few minutes.
If the display message continues to be displayed:

h There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or sev-

eral wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre
Tyre pressure mon‐ pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor was not restarted
itor inoperative after a wheel change.
wheel sensors miss‐
ing G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
pressure.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
or
X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
or
(Y page 254)
If the display message continues to be displayed:
h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the
tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
Correct tyre pres‐
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
sure
(Y page 253).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 254).
Z
186
Vehicle
b The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the

bulbs/LEDs are faulty.
Brake lamps inoper‐
ative G WARNING
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The
brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when
braking.
X Secure the vehicle from rolling away (Y page 138).
Switch off lights The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
X Turn the light switch to Ã or $.
\ A door or the tailgate is open. A warning tone also sounds.

The display shows the open doors/tailgate.
(Example of all doors
X Pull over, paying attention to road and traffic conditions,
and tailgate open)
and stop the vehicle, then close the doors and tailgate.
D The power steering assistance is faulty.
Steering malfunc‐ G WARNING

tion See Owner's You will need to use more force to steer.
Manual There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a quali-
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
D The power steering assistance may be malfunctioning. You may

need to use more force to steer.
Electronics mal‐
X Drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop and
function See Own‐
have the steering checked immediately.
er's Manual
ç The automatic Start/Stop function is malfunctioning and will

be switched off.
Malfunction See
Owner's Manual

è The vehicle is in automatic engine stop. You have opened the

driver's door or released the seat belt and the key is in the
When exiting: ignition lock.
remove key
X The engine will not start automatically.
X Please take note of the conditions for the automatic engine
stop/engine start (Y page 124).
è Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the

engine when pulling away or when stopping.
Depress clutch to
start engine
The engine starts automatically.

engine when pulling away or when stopping and the clutch sen-
Engage neutral to sor is inoperative.
start engine
X Engage neutral (Y page 127).
To start engine: Vehicles with manual transmission only: you are trying to start
shift to neutral the engine, a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not fully
or depress clutch depressed.
To start the engine:
X Engage neutral. (Y page 127)
or
To start engine: Vehicles with manual transmission only: the clutch sensor is
shift to neutral malfunctioning. You are trying to start the engine, a gear is
engaged and the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
X To start the engine, engage neutral. (Y page 127)
A Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N

flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A
Parking brake mal‐ warning tone also sounds.
function Apply
The parking lock is malfunctioning.
parking brake to
park X Apply the parking brake to park.
Z
188
Shift to P or N to Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently

start selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the
display.
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position D or R.
X Shift to P or N to start.
Shift to N to start Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently

selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the
display.
The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion.
X Shift to N to start.
A Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N is shown in the

middle of the display.
Apply brakes to
You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N
start
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Risk of vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission only: a warning tone

rolling Transmis‐ also sounds.
sion not in P The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is
in position R, N or D.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Fully close the driver's door.
S Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S is shown.

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
Transmission mal‐
function Visit
workshop
SorB/ Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes

7/C/ The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will
A feel the clutch pedal pulsate.
X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres.
Clutch protection
active See Owner's If the display message disappears, automatic transmission
Manual is available again.

SorB/ Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes

7/C/ A warning tone also sounds.
A Further pulling away or crawling manoeuvres have led to a
critical clutch temperature.
Transmission over‐
heated See Owner's
Manual paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and
the display message does not reappear after acknowledging
it.
Electronics mal‐ In addition, the \ door warning lamp and other warning
function Visit lamps, e.g. ÷, light up.
workshop The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
After the engine is switched off:
Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func-
tion of the key

Electronics mal‐ The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the idling

function Visit sensor is faulty.
workshop The Start/Stop function and cruise control are deactivated
automatically.
Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully
depressed.
Rain/light sensor The rain/light sensor is malfunctioning.

inoperative Automatic headlamp mode and automatic intermittent wipe are
not available.
X Switch on exterior lighting manually if required
(Y page 93).
X Switch the windscreen wipers on or off manually as required
(Y page 101).
Z
190
>> On-board computer and displays. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety
Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front
Only for certain coun- passenger to fasten their seat belts. An additional warning
tries: the red seat tone will sound if the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
belt warning lamp X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40).
lights up for six sec- The warning tone ceases.
onds after the engine
starts.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40).
engine, the red seat The warning lamp goes out.
belt warning lamp
lights up.
ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the
The red seat belt same time, you are driving faster than 20 km/h or have briefly
warning lamp flashes driven faster than 20 km/h.
and a warning tone X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40).
sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 191

Safety systems

6 The restraint system is faulty.
The red restraint sys- G WARNING
tem warning lamp is
lit while the engine is The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unin-
running. tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
gered.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 38).
J÷! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability

The red brake system Program) are malfunctioning. This means that Crosswind
warning lamp, the yel- Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
low ESP® warning lamp Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
and the yellow ABS
G WARNING
warning lamp light up
while the engine is The brake system continues to function normally, but without
running. the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could
vehicle.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied.

The red brake system X Release the parking brake.
warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning
tone also sounds.
Z
192

J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system G WARNING
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is The braking efficiency may be impaired.
running. A warning There is a risk of an accident.
tone also sounds. X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis-
play messages.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the
fault.
J EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning.

The red brake system This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist and hill start
warning lamp comes on assist, for example, are also unavailable.
while the engine is Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
running. A warning
tone also sounds. G WARNING
the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock
early if you brake hard, for example.
vehicle.

! ABS is malfunctioning. This means that ESP®, Crosswind Assist
The yellow ABS warn- and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
ing lamp is lit while Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if
you brake hard, for example.
vehicle.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that

other systems may be unavailable.
÷ The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.

The yellow ESP® warn- After the engine is switched off:
ing lamp is on when Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func-
you are driving. tion of the key
In addition, the \ Ryou can no longer start the engine
door warning lamp and X
Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis-
other warning lamps,
play messages.
e.g. h, light up.
÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk

The yellow ESP® warn- of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control is automatically deactivated.
the vehicle is in X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
motion. pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather con-
ditions.
Z
194

÷ ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
The yellow ESP® warn- This means that Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for
ing lamp is lit while example, are also unavailable.
the engine is running. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
thus increase.
The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer
working when braking.
vehicle.
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis-
play messages.
X Check that the brake lamps are working.
If the brake lamps are not working:

If the brake lamps are working:
^ The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
The yellow distance After the engine is switched off:
warning function Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func-
warning lamp comes on tion of the key
moving.
In addition, the \
door warning lamp and paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con-
other warning lamps, tinue driving under any circumstances.
e.g. ÷, light up.

^ The distance warning function is malfunctioning or tempora-
The yellow distance rily inoperative. Possible causes:
warning function Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty
warning lamp comes on Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
moving.
If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warn-

ing function is operational again.
If the distance warning lamp continues to light up, the dis-
tance warning function electronics are malfunctioning.
· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your

The red distance line of travel at too high a speed.
warning lamp lights X Be prepared to brake immediately.
up while the vehicle X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
is in motion. A warn- brake or take evasive action.
ing tone also sounds.
Further information on the distance warning function
(Y page 62).
· The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
The red distance selected.
warning lamp lights X Increase the distance.
up while the vehicle
is in motion.
Z
196
Engine

; The ignition system is malfunctioning. The engine is misfir-
The yellow engine ing, for example, which means the catalytic converter could
diagnostics warning become damaged.
lamp flashes while the X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
engine is running.
; The engine is running in emergency mode. This may lead to a
The yellow engine malfunctioning of the fuel injection system, for example.
diagnostics warning X Drive on carefully.
lamp lights up while X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The engine power out-
put is also reduced.
; There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine Rin the engine management
diagnostics warning Rin the exhaust system
lamp lights up while
Rin the fuel system
Rwith the accelerator pedal sensor
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
í The battery is not being charged.

The red battery warn- Possible causes:
ing lamp is lit while Rfaulty alternator
Rthe battery is faulty
A warning tone also
Rtorn poly-V-belt
sounds.
Ra malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over-
heat.

5 The engine oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine
The red oil pressure damage.
indicator lamp is lit X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
while the engine is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con-
running. A warning tinue driving under any circumstances.
tone also sounds. X Switch off the engine.
X Check the oil level (Y page 214).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 215).
Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from

any qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 110 †. The airflow to the

The red coolant tem- engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
perature warning low.
lamp comes on while G WARNING
A warning tone also The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be dam-
sounds. aged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your
engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns,
which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the
notes as you do so (Y page 272).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature
is below 110 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
Z
198
Tyres

h The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
You are driving and After the engine is switched off:
the yellow tyre pres- Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func-
sure monitor warning tion of the key
lamp (pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit.
In addition, the \
door warning lamp and play messages.
other warning lamps, X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
e.g. ÷, light up. paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con-
h The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.

You are driving and G WARNING
the yellow tyre pres-
sure monitor warning If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following
lamp (pressure loss/ hazards:
malfunction) is lit. A Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
warning tone also Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
sounds. Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat
build-up and possibly a fire
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or
braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions
as you do so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for
a flat tyre (Y page 229).

h There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or sev-
The yellow tyre pres- eral wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre
sure monitor warning pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor was not restarted
lamp (pressure loss/ after a wheel change.
malfunction) flashes G WARNING
for approximately
1 minute and then The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
remains lit. pressure.
play messages.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
or
X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
or
(Y page 254).
If the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp continues to
remain on:
h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the
You are driving and tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
the yellow tyre pres- X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
sure monitor warning (Y page 253).
lamp (pressure loss/ X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
malfunction) is lit. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 254).
Z
200
Vehicle

\ The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
The red door warning After the engine is switched off:
lamp comes on while Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func-
the vehicle is moving. tion of the key
In addition, further Ryou can no longer start the engine
warning lamps light
up, such as ÷.
play messages.
\ A door or the tailgate is open. If you are driving at speeds

The red door warning above 20 km/h, an additional warning tone will sound.
lamp is on. X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis-
play messages.
X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely,
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
D The power steering assistance is faulty.

The yellow power G WARNING
steering warning
lamp is lit while the You may need to use more force to steer.
engine is running. There is a risk of an accident.
play messages.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a quali-
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

ç The automatic Start/Stop function is malfunctioning and will
The yellow automatic be switched off.
Start/Stop function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
warning lamp is lit
when the vehicle is
stationary and while
it is moving.
ç Not all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off have
The yellow automatic been met.
Start/Stop function X Please take note of the conditions for automatic engine
warning lamp only switch-off (Y page 124).
lights up when the
è Vehicles with manual transmission only: the vehicle is at a
The green automatic standstill. No stop preventers are active. The clutch pedal is
Start/Stop system fully depressed.
indicator lamp starts The engine is not switched off automatically. The flashing
flashing when the indicator lamp is intended to remind you to activate the start/
vehicle is stationary stop function in order to save fuel.
and the engine is run- X Shift to neutral and slowly release the clutch pedal.
ning. (Y page 127).
The engine is switched off automatically.
è The vehicle is in automatic engine stop. The driver's door has

The green automatic been opened or the seatbelt removed while the ignition is
Start/Stop function switched on.
indicator lamp The engine will not start automatically.
flashes during the X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch
automatic engine pedal completely.
switch-off. A warning
Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the brake.
tone also sounds.

The green automatic engine when pulling away or when stopping.
Start/Stop system X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
indicator lamp starts The engine starts automatically.
flashing and the
engine is switched If the engine does not start automatically:
off. X Engage neutral (Y page 127).
Z
202
203
Useful information .......................... 204

Stowage areas ................................. 204
Features ........................................ 209
>> Stowing and features.

204 Stowage areas
Useful information The handling characteristics of a laden

vehicle are dependent on the distribution
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- of the load within the vehicle. For this
els, series and optional equipment for reason, you should observe the following
your vehicle that were available at the notes when transporting a load:
time of going to press. Country-specific Rnever exceed the maximum permissible
differences are possible. Note that your gross vehicle weight or the permissible
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- axle loads for the vehicle (including
tures described. This is also the case for occupants)

systems and functions relevant to safety. Rthe luggage compartment is the prefer-
i Read the information on qualified spe- red place to carry objects
cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Rstow heavy loads as far forwards and as
low down in the load compartment as pos-
sible.
Stowage areas Rthe load must not protrude above the
Loading guidelines upper edge of the seat backrests

Ralways place the load against the rear or
G WARNING front seat backrests. Make sure that the
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured seat backrests are securely locked into
or not secured sufficiently, they could place
slip, tip over or be flung around and Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a seats if possible
risk of injury, especially when braking or Ruse the lashing eyelets to transport loads
abruptly changing directions. and luggage
Always store objects so that they cannot be Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or components that are suitable for the
loads against slipping or tipping before weight and size of the load
the journey. Rstow objects in the ruffled pockets
behind the front seats
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If Stowage compartments
the tailgate is open when the engine is
running, particularly if the vehicle is Important safety notes
moving, exhaust fumes could enter the
passenger compartment. There is a risk of G WARNING
poisoning. If you stow objects in the vehicle interior
Turn off the engine before opening the in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu-
open. pants. There is a risk of injury, especially
in the case of heavy braking or a sudden
Your vehicle has not been approved by the change in direction.
manufacturer for towing a trailer. A
trailer could seriously impair driving
safety.
Stowage areas 205
RAlways stow objects so they cannot be X To lock: insert the key into the lock and
thrown around in these or similar situa- turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.
tions. X To unlock: insert the key into the lock
RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to posi-
trude over the top of stowage compart- tion 1.
ments or ruffled pockets.
RClose closable stowage compartments Stowage compartment in the doors
while driving.

The stowage compartments are located in
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
the front and rear doors.
ted, sharp-edged or fragile objects
behind the last bench seat or under the
passenger seats.

(Y page 204).
Glove compartment
Stowage compartment in the driver's door

: Stowage compartment
Bottles can be stowed in the doors.
Drawer in the centre console
Illustration of a closed glove compartment

X To open: pull handle :.
The closed glove compartment can be
locked with the key.
X Pull drawer ; by handle : in the direc-

tion of the arrow.
Z
206 Stowage areas
Rear stowage compartment (vehicles with Folding the rear seat backrest forward
readyspace seats)
! Vehicles with readyspace seats: if you
fold the rear backrests forwards, ensure
that the rear seat cushions are not rota-
ted. Otherwise, the backrests may be
damaged.
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints
(Y page 87).
X To open: pull the cover forward from han-

dle strip :.
Enlarging the luggage compartment

X Insert seat belt ; into seat-belt
G WARNING holder :.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in
the event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear
bench seat/rear seat or by the seat back-
rest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage
compartment cannot be restrained by the X Vehicles with one-piece rear bench seat:
seat backrest. pull left and right loop ; on the back-
This poses an increased risk of injury. rest at the same time in the direction of
Before every trip, make sure that the seat the arrow.
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat Backrest : is released.
are engaged before every trip. X Fold down complete backrest : fully.
X Vehicles with split rear bench seat: pull
Observe the loading guidelines left and right loop ; on the backrest in
(Y page 204). the direction of the arrow.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat The corresponding seat backrest : is
backrests, or the entire back row, depend- released.
ing on vehicle equipment, can be folded X Fold down corresponding backrest :
forwards to increase the luggage compart-
fully.
ment capacity.
Stowage areas 207
Folding the rear seat backrest back Vehicles with split rear bench seat: you can
move the rear seat backrests to a more
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
upright position (cargo position) to
become trapped when folding the rear
increase the luggage compartment capa-
seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could
city further.
be damaged.
X Release right-hand or left-hand seat
backrest ; (Y page 206).
X Fold right-hand or left-hand seat back-

rest ; slightly forwards.
X Vehicles with one-piece rear bench seat:

fold complete seat backrest : back
until it engages.
Ensure that red lock status indicator ;
on the loop is no longer visible. Illustration: seat backrest catch folded for-
X Vehicles with split rear bench seat: fold wards
back left or right seat backrest : until X Fold seat backrest catch : forwards.
it engages. X Fold right-hand or left-hand seat back-
Ensure that red lock status indicator ; rest : back to seat backrest catch :
on the loop is no longer visible. until it locks.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary The cargo position has been set up.
(Y page 87).
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat Readyspace seats

backrests (cargo position)
General notes
You can rotate the rear seat cushions 180°
and remove the cargo box. This will give
you a flat loading surface and a larger load
capacity in the rear.
Rotating the seat cushions

G WARNING
If you rotate the rear seat cushion when the
cargo box is removed, you or other vehicle
occupants could be caught in the seat mech-
anism. There is a risk of injury.
Only rotate the seat cushion if the cargo
box is fitted. Ensure that no parts of the
Z
208 Stowage areas
body are in the immediate vicinity of mov- Parcel shelf

ing parts.
! Do not fold the rear seat backrests for-

wards if the rear seat cushions have been
rotated. Otherwise, the rear seat backr-
ests may be damaged.
! The maximum load which may be placed

on the parcel shelf is 3 kg.
X To remove: unhook straps : from the
tailgate.
X Fold the parcel shelf downwards.
X Pull loop : and rotate seat cushion ; X Pull the parcel shelf out to the rear ;.
180°. X To fit: place the parcel shelf on the guide
rails on the left and right.
Removing cargo box X Push the parcel shelf evenly forwards
using both hands until it engages.
X Fold the parcel shelf up.
X Hook straps : to the tailgate.
Lashing eyelets
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 204).
X Release the cargo box using release han- RSecure the load using the lashing eye-
dle :. lets.
X Slide the cargo box forwards, in the RDistribute the load on the lashing eye-
direction of the arrow. lets evenly.
X Lift up and remove the cargo box. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route lashing materials across
sharp edges or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Features 209

: Lashing eyelets X Then slide the subwoofer over bracket =
in the direction of the arrow until the
subwoofer slides down.
Fitting/removing the subwoofer X Close quick-release fastener ?.
X To remove: release quick-release fas-
tener ?.
X Slide the subwoofer up over bracket =
and remove.
X Disconnect plug :.
X Take out subwoofer :.
Features
X To fit: insert connector :. Cup holders
X Place subwoofer ; on the side trim. Important safety notes
X Slide subwoofer ; to bracket =.
G WARNING
The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con-
tainer in place during a journey. If you use
a cup holder during a journey, the drinks
container could be flung around and liquid
could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could
come into contact with the liquid and, in
particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You
could be distracted from the traffic situa-
tion and lose control of the vehicle. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
X Slide the subwoofer up in the direction
stationary. Only place containers of a suit-
of the arrow on bracket =.
able size in the cup holder. Seal the con-
tainer, in particular when it contains hot
liquid.
Z
210 Features
G WARNING Cup holder in the centre console

If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when
braking or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot
be flung around in these or in similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, lug-
gage nets or stowage nets.
: Cup holders
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving. The cup holder has a recess for storing
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
selected mobile phones.
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the luggage compartment. Cup holders in the rear compartment
Only available with readyspace seats.
! Only use the cup holders for containers
of the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
(Y page 204).
Cup holder in the front centre console
: Cup holders
; Cup holders
X To use cup holder ; open the stowage
compartment.
Front cupholder ; can be removed. The
maximum permissible load of the resulting
: Cup holders stowage compartment is 1 kg
Features 211
Sun visors X To open: lift up cover :.

X To close: push down cover :.
Overview
X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out.
X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup
holder.
i If you remove the ashtray, you can use
the resulting compartment for stowage.

Cigarette lighter
: Mirror cover G WARNING

; Bracket You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga-
= Retaining strap
rette lighter.
? Vanity mirror
In addition, flammable materials can
ignite if:
Glare from the side
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
X Fold down the sun visor. Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
X Pull the sun visor out of bracket ;. objects, for example
X Swing the sun visor to the side. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob. Always make sure that the cigarette
Ashtray lighter is out of reach of children. Never
! The cup holder in the centre console is leave children unattended in the vehicle.
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
Your attention must always be focused on
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the traffic conditions. Only use the ciga-
the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup
rette lighter when road and traffic condi-
holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do
tions permit.
not fall into the cup holder.
Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam-
aged.
Z
212 Features
X Press in cigarette lighter :. is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do

Cigarette lighter : will pop out auto- not use loose floormats and do not place
matically when the heating element is several floormats on top of one another.
red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes

lock (Y page 121).
The sockets can be used for accessories
with a maximum draw of 120 W (10 A). Example
accessories include mobile phone charg-
ers. X Slide the driver's seat backwards.
If you use the sockets for long periods when X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
the engine is switched off, the battery may X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
discharge. ers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-
Socket in the front centre console
ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may
restrict the clearance around the pedals or
block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises
the operating and road safety of the vehi-
cle. There is a risk of an accident.
213

Checking service products ................. 214
Service .......................................... 218
Care .............................................. 220
>> Maintenance and care.

214 Checking service products
Useful information X Remove parcel shelf : (Y page 208) if

necessary.
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- X Hold the carpet on the right and left
els, series and optional equipment for sides and fold upwards.
your vehicle that were available at the X Remove the carpet from the vehicle.
time of going to press. Country-specific X Unscrew screws = from engine compart-
differences are possible. Note that your ment cover ; manually.
X Remove engine compartment cover ;.
systems and functions relevant to safety. X To close: slide engine compartment
cover ; forward as far as it will go.

X Retighten screws = manually.
X Put the carpet back into the vehicle.
X Fold down the carpet and push it under
Checking service products the side panelling.
X For vehicles with the subwoofer: fit the
Engine compartment (rear)
subwoofer again (Y page 214).
Engine compartment cover X Close the tailgate.
G WARNING
Engine oil
The engine compartment cover can become
very hot. There is a risk of injury if you General notes
remove the engine compartment cover to
Depending on your driving style, the vehi-
work in the engine compartment.
cle consumes up to 0.5 litres of oil per
Allow the engine to cool down before remov- 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher
ing the engine compartment cover. than this when the vehicle is new or if you
frequently drive at high engine speeds.
X To open: apply the parking brake.
When checking the oil level:
X Select a gear.
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface
X Switch the ignition off.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately 5 minutes if the engine is
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
at normal operating temperature
X For vehicles with the subwoofer: remove
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
the subwoofer (Y page 214). temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait approximately
30 minutes before carrying out the meas-
urement
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
Checking service products 215
There is a risk of injury when accessing the

engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
down and only touch the components descri-
bed in the following.
G WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is
overheating or while there is a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into

contact with hot gases or other leaking ser- Example
vice products. There is a danger of injury.
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dip-
Allow an overheating engine to cool down stick tube.
before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
in the engine compartment, leave the bon-
net closed and notify the fire brigade. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the
guide tube to the stop, and take it out
G WARNING again.
There are moving components in the engine If the level is between MIN mark = and
compartment. Certain components may con- MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
tinue to move or suddenly move again even
Adding engine oil
after the ignition has been switched off,
e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of G WARNING
injury. Certain components in the engine compart-
If you have to carry out work in the engine ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
compartment: radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
Rswitch
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
off the ignition
engine compartment.
Rnever touch the dangerous areas sur-
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
rounding moving components, e.g. the
down and only touch the components descri-
rotation area of the fan
bed in the following.
Rremove jewellery and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for G WARNING
example, away from moving parts. If engine oil comes into contact with hot
X
components in the engine compartment, it
Open the engine compartment cover
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and
(Y page 214).
injury.
Make sure that engine oil does not spill out
over the filler neck. Allow the engine to
cool down and thoroughly clean the compo-
nents that have come into contact with
engine oil before you start the engine.
Z
216 Checking service products
H Environmental note view or endanger other road users. There is

When topping up the oil, take care not to a risk of an accident and injury.
spill any. If oil enters the soil or water- Therefore, make sure that the service cover
ways, it is harmful to the environment. is locked before driving off.
! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with G WARNING

too much engine oil can result in damage If the windscreen wipers start to move when
to the engine or to the catalytic con- the service cover is open, you could become
verter. Have excess engine oil siphoned caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk
off. of injury.
You will find further information on Always switch off the windscreen wipers
engine oils you can use in the "Technical and the ignition before you open the ser-
data" section (Y page 271). vice cover.
! To ensure unhindered air intake, com-

pletely remove any dirt or snow from the
ventilation slots above the service
cover.
The service cover is attached to the rear
side of the vehicle body with a strap.
X Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface.
X Select a gear.
X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove X Switch the ignition off.

it.
Removing
X Top up the engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN
mark on the oil dipstick, top up once with
a maximum of 1 l engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Make sure that the cap locks securely into
place.
X Check the oil level again with the oil
dipstick (Y page 214).
Vehicles with a lockable service cover:

Front compartment
X To unlock: remove lock cover : (driver's
Service cover side only) with the key.
X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to
Important safety notes position u.
G WARNING
If the service cover is not locked, it may
come loose during driving and block your
Checking service products 217

X Pull both levers : with both index fin- X Press service cover = down in the direc-
gers in the direction of the arrows. tion of the arrow.
X Slide both levers ; in and then back.
X Press lever ; in the radiator trim and
allow it to engage.
X First pull both levers ; forwards and

then completely out.
X Lift service cover = and pull forwards.
X Put down service cover =. Vehicles with a lockable service cover:
X To lock: insert the key into the lock and
Inserting
turn it to position 1.
X Unhook service cover =.
Insert lock cover : flush (on the driv-
er's side) and clip it into place.
Coolant
G WARNING
The engine cooling system is under pres-
sure, particularly if the engine is warm.
You could be scalded by hot coolant spray-
ing out when opening the cap. There is a
danger of injury.
X Slide bars A on the left and right of the
service cover under the bars on wing ?. Allow the engine to cool before opening the
cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear
Z
218 Service
when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a Windscreen washer system
turn to allow pressure to escape.
G WARNING
Checking the coolant Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
The coolant expansion tank is in the area flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
under the service cover. components in the front compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and
injury.
Make sure that windscreen washer concen-
trate is not spilled next to the filler neck.

X Let the coolant cool down for at least
30 minutes.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level if the vehi-
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
cle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down. X If available, pull the removable nozzle
X Check the reservoir visually. up as far as the stop.

The fluid level must be between MIN and X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
MAX. X To close: if available, push the remova-
ble nozzle down and push it inside.
Topping up the coolant X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it
X Cover cap : of coolant expansion engages.
tank ; with a cloth.
X Slowly turn cap : by half a turn anti-
Further information on windscreen washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 273).
clockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
Service
remove it.
X Do not exceed the maximum filling level Service display
when adding coolant. Service message
X Screw on cap : tightly.
The service display informs you of the next
For further information on coolant, see service due date. Depending on the oper-
(Y page 272). ating conditions of the vehicle, the
remaining time or distance until the next
service due date is displayed.
Service 219
Information on the type of service and ser- Hiding a service message

vice intervals (see separate Service Book-
This function is only available with an
let).
instrument cluster with colour display.
For further information enquire at any
X Press the a button on the multifunc-
smart centre.
tion steering wheel.
i The service display does not show any
information on the engine oil level. Calling up the service display
Observe the notes on the engine oil level
(Y page 214). X Switch the ignition on.
X Depending on the equipment in the vehi-
Whenever a service is due, this is shown

approximately 30 days or 1500 km (1000 mi) cle, you can call up the service display
beforehand. After starting the engine, a with the buttons on the multifunction
service message appears in the instrument lever or on the multifunction steering
cluster display for a few seconds; see the wheel.
following example. Instrument cluster with monochrome dis-
RInstrument cluster with monochrome play
display X Use the ÷ multifunction lever to select
The ¯ or ° symbol flashes. If a the Service menu.
service due date has been exceeded, a The service display shows when the ser-
minus is shown before the information vice is due.
about the days or distance.
Instrument cluster with colour display
RInstrument cluster with colour display
Next service due in .. days together
steering wheel to select the Messages
with the ¯ or ° symbol. If the ser-
and service menu.
vice due date has been exceeded, Ser‐
The service display shows when the ser-
vice due .. days ago.
vice is due.
The symbol shows the type of service. ¯
stands for a minor service and ° for a
Information about Service
major service.
The service display does not take into Resetting the service display
account any periods of time during which ! Have service work carried out as
the battery is disconnected. described in the Service Booklet. This
Maintaining the time-dependent service may otherwise lead to increased wear and
schedule: damage to the major assemblies or the
X Note down the service due date in the vehicle.
service display before disconnecting A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
the battery. smart centre, will reset the service inter-
or val display after the service work has been
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract carried out. You can also obtain further
the battery disconnection periods from information on maintenance work, for
the service date shown on the display. example.
Z
220 Care
Special service requirements Do not touch the surfaces or protective

The prescribed service interval is based films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
on normal operation of the vehicle. Service scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
work will need to be performed more often damage the surfaces and protective film.
if the vehicle is operated under arduous ! Do not park up the vehicle for an exten-
conditions or increased loads, for exam- ded period straight after cleaning it,
ple: particularly after having cleaned the
Rregular city driving with frequent wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel clean-
intermediate stops ers could cause increased corrosion of
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel the brake discs and brake pads/linings.
short distances For this reason, you should drive for a

Rfor frequent operation in mountainous few minutes after cleaning. Braking
terrain or on poor road surfaces heats the brake discs and the brake pads/
linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
can then be parked up.
periods
In these or similar operating conditions, Regular care of your vehicle is a condition
have, for example, the air filter, engine for retaining the quality in the long term.
oil and oil filter changed more frequently. Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
The tyres must be checked more frequently ommended and approved by smart.
if the vehicle is operated under increased
loads. You can obtain further information
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Care of the exterior
smart centre. Automatic car wash
Driving abroad
G WARNING
An extensive smart service network is also
Braking efficiency is reduced after the
available in other countries. For further
vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of
information enquire at any smart centre.
an accident.
After washing the vehicle, brake carefully
Care while paying attention to the traffic con-
ditions in order to restore full braking
General notes efficiency.
H Environmental note ! Make sure that:
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning Rthe side windows are fully closed
cloths in an environmentally responsible
Rthe climate control blower is switched
manner.
off
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at
any of the following: position 0
Rdry, rough or hard cloths The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
Rabrasive cleaning agents You can wash the vehicle in an automatic
Rsolvents car wash from the very start.
Rcleaning agents containing solvents Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the
Do not scrub. vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Care 221
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off ! Always maintain a distance of at least
wax from the windscreen and the wiper 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-
blades. This will prevent smears and pressure cleaner nozzle. Information
reduce wiping noises caused by residue on about the correct distance is available
the windscreen. from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
Washing by hand around when cleaning your vehicle.
In some countries, washing by hand is only Do not aim directly at any of the follow-
allowed at specially equipped washing ing:
bays. Observe the legal requirements for Rtyres

each individual country. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Relectrical components
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rbattery
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
Rconnectors
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
Rlights
shampoo approved by smart.
Rseals
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
Rventilation slots
gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly Damaged seals or electrical components
towards the air inlet. can lead to leaks or failures.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
Cleaning the paintwork
sponge frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and ! Do not affix:
dry thoroughly with a chamois. Rstickers
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the Rfilms
paintwork. Rmagnetic plates or similar items
When using the vehicle in winter, remove to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
all traces of road salt deposits carefully damage the paintwork.
and as soon as possible.
X Remove impurities immediately, where
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too
High-pressure cleaning equipment
hard.
G WARNING X Soak insect remains with insect remover
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt and rinse off the treated areas after-
grinders) can cause damage not visible wards.
from the outside to tyres or chassis com- X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
ponents. Components damaged in this way off the treated areas afterwards.
can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
accident. oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. lighter fluid.
Have damaged tyres or chassis components X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
replaced immediately. X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Z
222 Care
The following cannot always be completely Always switch off the windscreen wipers
repaired: and the ignition before cleaning the wind-
Rscratches screen or wiper blades.
Rcorrosive deposits
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive prod-
Rareas affected by corrosion ucts, solvents or cleaning agents con-
Rdamage caused by inadequate care taining solvents to clean the inside of
In such cases, visit a qualified specialist the windows. Do not touch the insides of
workshop. the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice
scraper or ring. There is otherwise a
risk of damaging the windows.
Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING ! Clean the water drainage channels of
the windscreen and the rear window at
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt
regular intervals. Deposits such as
grinders) can cause damage not visible
leaves, petals and pollen may under cer-
from the outside to tyres or chassis com-
tain circumstances prevent water from
ponents. Components damaged in this way
draining away. This can lead to corro-
can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an
sion damage and damage to electronic
accident.
components.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.
Have damaged tyres or chassis components dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
replaced immediately. agent that is recommended and approved
by smart.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod-
ucts to remove brake dust. This could Cleaning the wiper blades
damage wheel bolts and brake compo-
nents. G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
! Do not park up the vehicle for an exten-
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
ded period straight after cleaning it,
blades, you could become trapped. There is
particularly after having cleaned the
a danger of injury.
wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel clean-
ers could cause increased corrosion of Always switch off the windscreen wipers
the brake discs and brake pads/linings. and the ignition before cleaning the wind-
For this reason, you should drive for a screen or wiper blades.
few minutes after cleaning. Braking
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Other-
heats the brake discs and the brake pads/
wise, the wiper blade could be damaged.
linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked up. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
Cleaning the windows graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
blades, you could become trapped. There is
a danger of injury.
Care 223
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-

screen.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when fold-
ing back. The windscreen could be dam-
aged if the wiper arm hits against it
suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic len-
ses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
ing.
Cleaning the reversing camera
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild ! Do not clean the camera lens and the
cleaning agent, e.g. smart car shampoo or area around the reversing camera with a
cleaning cloths. high-pressure cleaner.
Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a high-
pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep
a distance of at least 30 cm between the
vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner
nozzle. Information about the correct
distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer.
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

camera lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe

Impurities combined with the effects of
road grit and corrosive environmental fac-
tors may cause flash rust to form on the
surface. You can restore the original shine
of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regu-
larly, especially in winter and after wash-
ing.
Z
224 Care
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- ! Do not affix the following to plastic
based cleaning agents, such as sanitary surfaces:
cleanser or wheel cleaner. Rstickers
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care prod- Rfilms
uct tested and approved by smart. Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
Interior care ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repel-
lent or sunscreen to come in contact with
Cleaning the display the plastic trim. This maintains the
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- high-quality look of the surfaces.
lowing: X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-
Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care products and
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by smart.
cleaning agents
The surface may change colour tempora-
These may damage the display surface. Do rily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrep-
arable damage to the display. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X Before cleaning the display, make sure
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
that it is switched off and has cooled
down. leather care agents that have been rec-
X Clean the display surface using a com-
ommended and approved by smart.
mercially available microfibre cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner. Cleaning the seat covers
X Dry the display surface using a dry
General notes
microfibre cloth.
! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean
genuine leather, artificial leather or
Cleaning the plastic trim DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can
G WARNING damage the cover.
Care products and cleaning agents contain- i Note that regular care is essential to
ing solvents can cause surfaces in the cock- make sure that the appearance and com-
pit to become porous. This could result in fort of the covers are retained over time.
plastic parts breaking away when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a danger of Genuine leather seat covers
injury. Leather is a natural product.
Do not use care products and cleaning It has natural surface properties, e.g.:
agents containing solvents to clean the Runevenness in structure
cockpit. Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rsubtle colour differences
These are characteristics of leather and

not material faults.
Care 225
! To maintain the leather's natural belts at temperatures above 80 † or in

appearance, observe the following direct sunlight.
cleaning tips: X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap sol-
Rclean genuine leather covers carefully ution.
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
RMake sure that the leather does not
X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked. brush or a cleaning agent recommended
and approved by smart.
ROnly use leather care agents that have

been recommended by smart. You can X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
obtain these from a qualified special- cleaning agents recommended and
ist workshop. approved by smart.
Seat covers from other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean artificial leather covers with a
cloth moistened with a solution con-
taining 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up
liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre
cloth moistened with a solution con-
taining 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up
liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe
entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend
on the type of dirt and how long it has
been there.
RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts may be severely weakened if
bleached or coloured. This may lead to the
seat belts, for example, tearing or failing
in an accident. There is an increased risk
of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never bleach or colour seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chem-

ical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
Z
226
227

Where will I find...? ......................... 228
Flat tyres ....................................... 229
Battery (vehicle) ............................. 233
Jump-starting ................................. 236
Towing and tow-starting ................... 238
Electrical fuses .............................. 241
>> Breakdown assistance.

228 Where will I find...?
Useful information Setting up the warning triangle

els, series and optional equipment for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
X Fold feet = out to the side.
X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a

Where will I find...? triangle and lock them at the top using
upper press-stud :.
Warning triangle
Removing/replacing the warning trian-
gle First-aid kit
Warning triangle : is located in the boot First-aid kit ; is located in the boot
behind the rear seat backrest, secured to behind the rear seat backrest, secured to
the carpet with a Velcro fastener. the carpet with a Velcro fastener.
X Remove warning triangle : from the X To remove: remove first-aid kit ;.
boot. X To replace: press the side of first-aid
X To replace: press the side of warning kit ; with the Velcro fastener firmly in
triangle : with the Velcro fastener the relevant position.
firmly in the relevant position.
i Check the use-by date on first-aid
kit ; at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace any
missing items.
Flat tyres 229
Fire extinguisher
: Towing eye
; Tyre sealant filler bottle
Fire extinguisher ; is located in front of

= Tyre inflation compressor
the passenger's seat.
X Pull tab : forwards.
X Remove fire extinguisher ;. Flat tyres
i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled Preparing the vehicle
after each use and checked every one to Your vehicle may be equipped with a
two years. It may otherwise fail in an TIREFIT kit (Y page 229).
emergency.
Information on changing a wheel/fitting
Observe the legal requirements for each (Y page 256).
individual country.
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and
Vehicle tool kit level ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
The TIREFIT kit and the towing eye are X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
located in the stowage well under the front-
(Y page 138).
passenger footwell.
X If possible, bring the front wheels into
the straight-ahead position.
X Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that no one is near the danger
area while a wheel is being changed.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in
the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X Unscrew wing nuts :. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
X Remove the vehicle tool tray. traffic conditions when doing so.
230 Flat tyres
X Close the driver's door. drink plenty of water. Do not induce vom-
X Place the warning triangle a suitable iting, and seek medical attention imme-
distance away (Y page 228). Observe legal diately.
requirements. RImmediately change out of clothing
which has come into contact with tyre
sealant.
TIREFIT kit RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med-
ical attention immediately.
TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up pressor for longer than 15 minutes at a
to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-

peratures down to Ò20 †. The tyre inflation compressor can be
operated again once it has cooled down.
G WARNING
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
In the following situations, the tyre seal-
instructions on the sticker on the tyre
ant is unable to provide sufficient break-
inflation compressor.
down assistance, as it is unable to seal the
tyre properly:
Using the TIREFIT kit
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
X Do not remove any foreign objects which
larger than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
nails.
Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle and the
or on a flat tyre.
tyre inflation compressor from the
There is a risk of an accident. front-passenger footwell (Y page 229).
Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker
fied specialist workshop. to the instrument cluster within the
driver's field of vision.
G WARNING
The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irri-
tation. It must not come into contact with
your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.
Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre
sealant away from children. There is a risk
of injury.
If you come into contact with the tyre seal-
ant, observe the following:
RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse them
thoroughly with clean water.
RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and
Flat tyres 231
X Unwind plug : with the cable from the If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
tyre inflation compressor ;. has not been achieved after a maximum of
X Remove hose A from the bottom section 15 minutes, see "Tyre pressure is not ach-
of tyre inflation compressor housing ;. ieved" (Y page 231).
X Remove cap on tyre sealant bottle ? and i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to
connect hose A. dry. It can then be removed like a layer of
film.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing,
have it cleaned as soon as possible with
perchloroethylene.
Tyre pressure not reached

If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been achieved after a maximum of
10 minutes:
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
X X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
Remove the cap from valve E on the
faulty tyre. the defective tyre.
X Remove cap on filler hose = and screw X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
filler hose = onto the valve. approximately 10 m.

X Pump up the tyre again.
X Insert plug : into the socket of the cig-
arette lighter (Y page 211) or into the 12 V After a maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre
power socket in your vehicle (Y page 212). pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
lock (Y page 121). G WARNING
X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation
If the required tyre pressure is not reached
compressor ; to I. after the specified time, the tyre is too
The tyre inflation compressor is badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
switched on. The tyre is inflated. repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged
i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can
tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to significantly impair the vehicle's braking
approximately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi). and driving characteristics. There is a
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- risk of accident.
pressor during this phase. Do not continue driving. Contact a quali-
X
Let the tyre inflation compressor run for
a maximum of 15 minutes. The tyre should
then have attained a pressure of at least Tyre pressure reached
180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
G WARNING
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
is achieved after a maximum of 15 minutes, impairs the driving characteristics and is
see "Tyre pressure is achieved" not suitable for higher speeds. There is a
(Y page 231). risk of accident.
Z
232 Flat tyres
You should therefore adapt your driving and driving characteristics. There is a
style accordingly and drive carefully. Do risk of accident.
not exceed the specified maximum speed Do not continue driving. Contact a quali-
with a tyre that has been repaired using fied specialist workshop.
tyre sealant.
X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at
The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). For values,
tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The 80 km/h maxi- see the tyre pressure information label
mum speed sticker must be affixed to the on the driver's side B-pillar.
instrument cluster within the driver's
X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
field of vision.
the tyre inflation compressor.
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run
out of the filler hose. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed
of professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress
has been achieved after 10 minutes: pressure release button : next to pres-
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. sure gauge ;.
X X If the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the defective tyre. the filler hose from the valve of the
sealed tyre.
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
inflation compressor and the warning sealed tyre.
triangle.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
X Pull away immediately.
workshop and have the tyre changed
X Stop after driving for approximately there.
3 km and check the tyre pressure with the X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the
tyre inflation compressor. filler hose replaced as soon as possible
The tyre pressure must now be at least at a qualified specialist workshop.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced
G WARNING every four years at a qualified special-

ist workshop.
If the required tyre pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tyre is
too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged
tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can
significantly impair the vehicle's braking
Battery (vehicle) 233
Battery (vehicle) The highly flammable gas mixture is cre-

ated while the battery is charging and when
Important safety notes jump-starting.
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or Always make sure that neither you nor the
installing, requires specialist knowledge battery is electrostatically charged. Elec-
and the use of special tools. Therefore, trostatic charge is created, for example:
always have work on the battery carried out Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing
at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdue to friction between clothing and the
G WARNING seat
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery Rwhen you pull or push the battery across
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and carpet or other synthetic materials
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth

can lead to function restrictions applying
to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting G WARNING
system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) During the charging process, a battery pro-
or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). duces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
The operating safety of your vehicle may be occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
restricted. gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explo-
sion.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
example:
connected battery does not come into
Rwhen braking contact with vehicle parts.
Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeu- RNever place metal objects or tools on a
vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is battery.
not adapted to the road conditions
RIt is important that you observe the
There is a risk of an accident. described order of the battery terminals
In the event of a short circuit or a similar when connecting and disconnecting a
incident, contact a qualified specialist battery.
workshop immediately. Do not drive any RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
further. Always have work on the battery battery poles with identical polarity are
carried out at a qualified specialist work- connected.
shop.
RIt is particularly important to observe
Further information about ABS (Y page 62) the described order when connecting and
and esp® (Y page 64). disconnecting the jump leads.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
G WARNING terminals while the engine is running.
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the cre-
ation of sparks, which could ignite the G WARNING
highly explosive gases of a battery. There Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
is a risk of an explosion. injury.
Before handling the battery, touch the Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
vehicle body to remove any existing elec- ing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do
trostatic build-up. not lean over the battery. Keep the batter-
ies out of the reach of children. Immedi-
ately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with
Z
234 Battery (vehicle)
plenty of clean water and seek medical Comply with safety precautions and take
attention at once. protective measures when handling batter-
ies.
H Environmental note WARNING
Batteries contain pollu-
tants. It is illegal to dis-
pose of them with the Fire, naked flames and smoking
household rubbish. They are prohibited when handling
must be collected sepa- the battery. Avoid creating
rately and disposed of in an sparks.
environmentally responsi-
ble recycling system.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid
contact with the skin, eyes or
Dispose of batteries in an
clothing.
environmentally responsi-
ble manner. Take dis-
Wear suitable protective cloth-
charged batteries to a
ing, in particular gloves, an
qualified specialist work-
apron and a face mask.
shop or to a collection Immediately rinse acid splashes
point for used batteries. off with clean water. Consult a
doctor if necessary.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a Wear eye protection.
Observe the service intervals in the Ser-
vice Booklet or contact a qualified spe- Keep children away.
cialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified spe- Observe this Owner's Manual.
cialist workshop. If, in exceptional cir-
cumstances, you need to disconnect the
battery yourself, please make sure that:
Ryou have switched off the engine and For safety reasons, smart recommends that
removed the key. Check to see that you only use batteries which have been tes-
there are no indicator lamps lighting ted and approved specifically for your
in the instrument cluster. Electronic vehicle by smart. These batteries provide
components such as the alternator may increased impact protection to prevent
otherwise be damaged. vehicle occupants from suffering acid
Ryou have first removed the negative burns should the battery be damaged in the
terminal and then the positive termi- event of an accident.
nal. Never mix up the terminal clamps. In order for the battery to achieve the max-
The vehicle's electronics system may imum possible service life, it must always
otherwise be damaged. be sufficiently charged.
The battery and the cover of the positive Like other batteries, the vehicle battery
terminal clamp must be fitted securely may discharge over time if you do not use
during operation. the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery
disconnected at a qualified specialist
workshop. To maintain the charge, you can
Battery (vehicle) 235
also charge the battery with a charger rec- Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
ommended by smart. For more information, charging it or jump-starting.
please contact a qualified specialist
workshop. ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
Have the battery charge checked more fre- mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for X Open the service cover (Y page 216).
short trips or if you leave it standing idle X Connect the battery charger to the posi-
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified tive terminal and earth point in the same
specialist workshop if you wish to leave order as when connecting the donor bat-
your vehicle parked up for a long period of tery in the jump-starting procedure
time. (Y page 236).
i When you park the vehicle, remove the If the indicator/warning lamps do not light

key if you do not require any electrical up at low temperatures, it is very likely
consumers. The vehicle will then use very that the discharged battery has frozen. In
little energy, thus conserving battery this case you may neither jump-start the
power. vehicle nor charge the battery. The service
life of a battery that has been thawed may
be reduced. The starting characteristics
Charging the battery may be impaired, especially at low tem-
G WARNING peratures. Have the thawed battery checked
at a qualified specialist workshop.
During charging and jump-starting, explo-
sive gases can escape from the battery. Only charge the fitted battery with a bat-
There is a risk of an explosion. tery charger which has been tested and
approved by smart. A battery charger spe-
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, cre-
cially adapted for smart vehicles, and tes-
ating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is
ted and approved by smart, is available as
sufficient ventilation while charging and
an accessory. It permits the charging of the
jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
battery in its installed position. Contact a
smart centre for further information and
G WARNING
availability. Read the battery charger's
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of operating instructions before charging
injury. the battery.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
ing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do
not lean over the battery. Keep the batter-
ies out of the reach of children. Immedi-
ately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with
plenty of clean water and seek medical
attention at once.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temper-
atures below freezing point. When jump-
starting the vehicle or charging the bat-
tery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Z
236 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off
battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is suffi-
cient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when con-
necting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are con-
nected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jump leads.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting
the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter
could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that
the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The
starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the
thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting 237
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is
discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery
using jump leads. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not
accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start
connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery

a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:

RThe jump leads are not damaged.
RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jump leads are connected to the battery.
RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the wiper rods or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle using the parking brake.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc.
X Open the service cover.
Z
238 Towing and tow-starting
Position number A identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent
jump-starting device.
X Remove the protective cover from positive terminal :.
X Connect positive terminal : on your battery to positive terminal ; of donor battery
A using the jump lead. Begin with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to negative terminal ? of your
battery using the jump lead. Connect the jump lead to donor battery A first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.
X First disconnect the jump lead from negative terminal ? and negative terminal = and
then from positive terminal : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the con-
tacts on your own vehicle first.
X Attach the protective cover to positive terminal :.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the
vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a
G WARNING risk of an accident.
Safety relevant functions are restricted or Always switch on the ignition when towing
no longer available if: with a tow rope or a towing bar.
Rthe engine is not running
G WARNING
Rthe brake system or power steering is
When towing or tow-starting another vehi-
malfunctioning
cle and its weight is greater than the per-
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage sup-
missible gross weight of your vehicle, the:
ply or the vehicle's electrical system
Rtowing eye may be torn off
When your vehicle is towed away or towed
Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or
started, you may require considerably more
effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of even overturn
an accident. There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before When towing or tow-starting another vehi-
being towed away or tow started, make sure cle, its weight should not be greater than
the steering moves freely. the permissible gross weight of your vehi-
cle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehi-

cle weight rating can be found on the vehi-
cle identification plate (Y page 267).
Towing and tow-starting 239
! Observe the following points when tow- locked out when pushing or towing the
ing with a tow rope: vehicle.
Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted:
both vehicles. Do not tow away the vehicle with the basic
Rmake sure that the tow rope is not lon- carrier fitted.
ger than legally permitted. Mark the Do not secure the tow cable or tow bar to
tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a the basic carrier.
white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes
other road users aware that a vehicle is
being towed. Fitting/removing the towing eye
Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing
eye. Fitting the towing eye

Robserve the brake lamps of the towing
vehicle while driving. Always main-
tain a distance so that the tow rope
does not sag.
Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow
your vehicle. You could otherwise dam-
age the vehicle.
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehi-
cle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with
a crane.
! Pull away smoothly when towing away or
tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive
power is too high, the vehicles could be
damaged.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must
not be exceeded.
For towing distances over 50 km, the
entire vehicle must be lifted up and
transported. X Remove the towing eye from the stowage
Observe the legal requirements for the rel- space.
evant countries when towing and tow-start- The towing eye is located in the vehicle
ing. tool kit stowage compartment in the
It is better to have the vehicle transported front-passenger footwell (Y page 229).
than to have it towed. X Carefully prise out cover : using a
The battery must be connected and charged. suitable tool, e.g. a plastic wedge.
Otherwise, you cannot turn the key to posi- X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
tion 2 in the ignition lock. stop and tighten it.
i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off
the automatic locking feature
(Y page 73). You could otherwise be
Z
240 Towing and tow-starting
Removing the towing eye X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
X
lock.
Position top of cover : in the bumper
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
and press it in at the bottom until it
engages. X Leave the key in position 2 in the igni-
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool tion lock.
kit stowage compartment in the front- X Release the brake pedal.
passenger footwell (Y page 229). X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 96).
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle

When towing your vehicle with the rear axle (Y page 238).
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 238).
! The ignition must be switched off if you Transporting the vehicle
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
raised. Intervention by ESP® could oth- wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
erwise damage the brake system. axle or steering components. Otherwise,
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps the vehicle could be damaged.
(Y page 96). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
X Bring the front wheels into the straight- lock.
ahead position. As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
lock and remove the key from the ignition
lock. applying the parking brake.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the key
with you. lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehi-

Towing the vehicle with both axles on cle onto a trailer or transporter for trans-
the ground porting purposes.
i In order to signal a change of direction
when towing with the hazard warning
Tow-starting (emergency engine start-
lamps switched on, use the combination
ing)
switch as usual. In this case, only the
turn signals for the desired direction i You can find information on "Jump-
flash. When you reset the combination starting" at (Y page 236).
switch, the hazard warning lamps start Before tow-starting the following condi-
flashing again. tions must be fulfilled:
Rthe battery is connected.
Rthe engine has cooled down.
Rthe exhaust system has cooled down.
Electrical fuses 241
When tow-starting, it is important that you Always replace faulty fuses with specified
observe the safety instructions new fuses of the correct amperage.
(Y page 238) and the legal requirements in
each respective country. ! Only use fuses that have been approved
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps for smart vehicles and which have the
(Y page 96). correct fuse rating for the system con-
X Fit the towing eye (Y page 239).
cerned. Components or systems could
otherwise be damaged.
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
rope. The fuses in your vehicle serve to discon-
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
nect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
components on the circuit and their func-
tions will fail.
lock.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of

X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage
the same rating, which you can recognise by
second gear and keep the clutch pedal the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings
fully depressed. are listed in the fuse allocation chart
X Release the brake pedal. (Y page 243).
X Tow-start the vehicle. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have
X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not the cause traced and rectified at a quali-
depress the accelerator pedal while fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
doing so. Benz Service Centre.
X When the engine is started, immediately
depress the clutch pedal fully and select
neutral. Before replacing a fuse
X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
vehicle safely, paying attention to road (Y page 138).
and traffic conditions. X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
with the parking brake. lock and remove it (Y page 121). All indi-
X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing cator lamps in the instrument cluster
rope. must be off.
X Remove the towing eye (Y page 240).
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
RFuse box in the front area
RFuse box in the glove compartment
Electrical fuses
Important safety notes Fuse box in the front area
G WARNING Pay attention to the "Important safety
notes" (Y page 241).
If you manipulate, bridge or replace a
faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper- G WARNING
age, the electric cables could be overloa- If the windscreen wipers start to move when
ded. This may result in a fire. There is a the service cover is open, you could become
risk of an accident and injury. caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk
of injury.
Z
242 Electrical fuses
Always switch off the windscreen wipers

and the ignition before you open the ser-
vice cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that
it is lying correctly on the fuse box.
Moisture seeping in or dirt could other-
wise impair the operation of the fuses.
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are X Open the front-passenger door.
switched off. X Vehicles with lockable glove compart-
ment: open the glove compartment.

X To open: open cover : in the direction
of the arrow.
X To close: insert and fold in cover :
until it engages.
X Vehicles with lockable glove compart-
ment: close the glove compartment.

You can now see fuse box :.
Fuse box in the glove compartment

Fuse box
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the
dashboard. You could damage the dash-
board or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that
it is lying correctly on the fuse box.
Moisture seeping in or dirt could other-
wise impair the operation of the fuses.
Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod-
ing
1 Starter motor 5A Brown
2 Power steering control unit 5A Brown
3 Lighting control unit 5A Brown
4 Airbag 5A Brown
5 ‑ ‑ ‑
6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red
7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue
8 Control unit power supply 10 A Red
9 Control unit power supply 10 A Red
10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow
11 Turn signals 15 A Blue
12 Central control unit 10 A Red
13 Central control unit 15 A Blue
14 Power windows (anti-entrapment feature) 30 A Green
15 esp® 5A Brown
16 Interior lighting 10 A Red
17 Immobiliser 3A Violet
Z
244 Electrical fuses

ing
18 Electrical exterior mirror 5A Brown
19 Brake lamps 10 A Red
20 Parking aid, headlamp settings, Lane Keeping 15 A Blue
Assist
21 Engine control unit 5A Brown
22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue
23 Starter motor 30 A Green
24 Central locking 40 A Orange

25 Front windscreen wipers 30 A Green
26 Radio 20 A Yellow
27 ‑ ‑ ‑
28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue
29 Power supply control unit 5A Brown
30 Horn 15 A Blue
31 ‑ ‑ ‑
32 Central locking 15 A Blue
33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning 25 A Cyan
lamp button, locking button, headlamp range
control, power windows, licence plate lighting,
radio, control unit for air-conditioning sys-
tem, cruise control, limiter, parking aid but-
ton, program selector button, tailgate unlock-
ing, Lane Keeping Assist camera, automatic
start/stop system button
34 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan
35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan
36 ‑ ‑ ‑
37 ‑ ‑ ‑
38 ‑ ‑ ‑
39 ‑ ‑ ‑
40 ‑ ‑ ‑

ing
41 ‑ ‑ ‑
42 ‑ ‑ ‑
43 Exterior mirror heating 5A Brown
44 Anti-entrapment feature 25 A Cyan
45 Transmission control unit 5A Brown
46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow
47 ‑ ‑ ‑

48 ‑ ‑ ‑
49 ‑ ‑ ‑
Z
246
247

Important safety notes ...................... 248
Operation ...................................... 248
Winter operation ............................. 250
Tyre pressure .................................. 251
Changing a wheel ............................. 255
Wheel and tyre combinations .............. 260
>> Wheels and tyres.

248 Operation
Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- workshop and enquire about:
els, series and optional equipment for Rsuitability
your vehicle that were available at the Rlegal stipulations
time of going to press. Country-specific Rfactory recommendations
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- Information on dimensions and types of
tures described. This is also the case for wheels and tyres for your vehicle
systems and functions relevant to safety. (Y page 260).
Information on air pressure for the tyres on
i Read the information on qualified spe- your vehicle can be found:
Ron the tyre pressure information label on
the driver's side B-pillar
Important safety notes Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 251)
Modification work on the brake system and
G WARNING wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are spacers or brake dust shields is not per-
used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- mitted. This invalidates the general oper-
ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of ating permit for the vehicle.
an accident. i Further information on wheels and
Always replace wheels and tyres with those tyres can be obtained at any qualified
that fulfil the specifications of the orig- specialist workshop.
inal part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct: Operation
Rdesignation Information on driving
Rtype
RCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust
correct: before beginning your journey.
Rdesignation RWhile driving, pay attention to vibra-
Rmanufacturer tions, noises and unusual handling char-
Rtype acteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.
This may indicate that the wheels or
G Warning tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a
tyre is defective, reduce your speed
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving,
immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as
steering and braking characteristics of
possible to check the wheels and tyres for
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
damage. Hidden tyre damage could also
Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately be causing the unusual handling charac-
replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, teristics. If you find no signs of damage,
or consult a qualified specialist workshop. have the tyres and wheels checked at a
Accessories that are not approved for your
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure
vehicle by smart or that are not being used
correctly can impair driving safety. that the tyres do not get deformed by the
Operation 249
kerb or other obstacles. If it is neces- Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary

sary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or (Y page 251).
similar elevations, try to do so slowly The service life of tyres depends on vari-
and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the ous factors, including the following:
tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be
Rdriving style
damaged.
Rtyrepressure
Rmileage
Regular checking of wheels and tyres
G WARNING Notes on tyre profile
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose G WARNING
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre
accident. traction. The tyre is no longer able to dis-
Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam- sipate water. This means that on wet road
age and replace any damaged tyres imme- surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increa-
diately. ses, in particular where speed is not adap-
ted to suit the driving conditions. There is

Regularly check the wheels and tyres of a risk of accident.
your vehicle for damage, at least once a If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
month, as well as after driving on rough tyres may exhibit different levels of wear
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of at different locations on the tyre tread.
tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to Thus, you should regularly check the tread
damage such as: depth and the condition of the tread across
Rcuts in the tyres the entire width of all tyres.
Rpunctures in the tyres Minimum tyre tread depth for:
Rtears in the tyres Rsummer tyres: 3 mm
Rbulges on tyres RM+S tyres: 4 mm
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
wheels the legally prescribed limit for the mini-
Regularly check the tyre tread depth and mum tyre tread depth is reached.
the condition of the tread across the whole
width of the tyre (Y page 249). If necessary,
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
inspect the inner side of the tyre surface.
G WARNING
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
capacity and the approved maximum speed
fit anything onto the valve other than the
could lead to tyre damage or the tyre burst-
standard valve cap or other valve caps
ing. There is a risk of accident.
approved for your vehicle by smart. Do not
fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
tyre pressure monitoring systems. approved for your vehicle model. Observe
the tyre load rating and speed rating
Regularly check the pressure of all the
required for your vehicle.
tyres, particularly prior to long trips.
Z
250 Winter operation
Pay special attention to the country-spe- nently. smart cannot accept responsibility
cific requirements for tyre approval. for this type of damage.
These requirements can stipulate a spe-
G WARNING
cific tyre type for your vehicle. Further-
more, the use of certain tyre types in cer- Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation
tain regions and areas of operation can be pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
highly beneficial. You can find further control of your vehicle. There is a risk of
information regarding tyres at specialist accident.
tyre retailers, at qualified specialist Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam-
workshops or at any smart centre. age and replace any damaged tyres imme-
ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type diately.
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to fit a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat M+S tyres
tyre. G WARNING
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less
wheels. than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter
RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for
as they do not provide sufficient traction.

the first 100 km. They only reach their There is a risk of accident.
full performance after this distance. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
RDo not drive with tyres which have too 4 mm must be replaced.
little tread depth. This otherwise sig-
nificantly reduces the traction on wet At temperatures below +7 † use winter
roads (aquaplaning). tyres marked with M+S.
RReplace the tyres after six years at the Only winter tyres bearing the i snow-
latest, regardless of wear. flake symbol in addition to the M+S mark-
ing provide the best possible grip in win-
try road conditions. Only these tyres will
Winter operation allow driving safety systems such as ABS
and ESP® to function optimally in winter.
General notes
These tyres have been developed specifi-
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a cally for driving in snow.
qualified specialist workshop at the onset Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on
of winter. all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
Observe the notes in the "Changing a acteristics.
wheel" section (Y page 255). Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tyres you have
fitted. Therefore, only use tyre types and
Driving with summer tyres sizes approved for smart. Observe the tyre
At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres load rating and speed rating required for
lose elasticity and therefore traction and smart.
braking power. Change the tyres on your Tyres with a specified direction of rota-
vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at tion have additional benefits, e.g. if there
very cold temperatures could cause tears to is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages
form, thereby damaging the tyres perma- can only be gained if the tyres are fitted
Tyre pressure 251
corresponding to the direction of rota- contact the smart centre or a qualified

tion. specialist workshop.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indi- If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
cates its correct direction of rotation. the following points in mind:
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower max- Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all
imum permissible speed than that of the wheel-tyre combinations. Permissible
vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 260).
in the driver's field of vision. This can be Ronly use snow chains when the road sur-
obtained at a qualified specialist work- face is completely snow-covered. Remove
shop. the snow chains as soon as possible when
Under these circumstances, you should also you come to a road that is not snow-cov-
use the speed limiter to restrict the max- ered.
imum speed of the vehicle so that it does Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of
not exceed the maximum permissible speed snow chains. Observe the appropriate
for the M+S tyres (Y page 147). regulations if you wish to fit snow
When you have fitted the M+S tyres: chains.
X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 251). Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible

X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (vehi- speed of 50 km/h.
cles with black and white display)
(Y page 254).
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (vehi-
Tyre pressure
cles with colour display) (Y page 254). Tyre pressure specifications
G WARNING
Snow chains Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose
the following risks:
G WARNING Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the
If you have fitted snow chains to the front load and vehicle speed increase.
wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or
body or chassis components. This could
unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as
To avoid hazardous situations:
steering and braking, may be greatly
Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels impaired.
Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in There is a risk of an accident.
pairs. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and
check the tyre pressure of all the tyres:
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit
snow chains on steel wheels, you may Rat least every two weeks
damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps Rwhen the load changes
from the relevant wheels before fitting Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
the snow chains. Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g.
smart recommends that you only use snow off-road driving
chains that have been specially approved If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
for smart. For more information, please
Z
252 Tyre pressure
G WARNING
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto
tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloa-
ded and malfunction, which can cause tyre
pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pressure
monitoring systems will cause the tyre
valve to remain open. This can also result
in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by smart for
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the
your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
following tyre pressure information is
only valid for that tyre size.
G WARNING
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the
tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a
wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre
tyre does not permit any reliable conclu-
pressure that is too low may result in a tyre
sion about the tyre pressure.
blow-out. There is a risk of accident.
If possible, only correct tyre pressures

RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.
when the tyres are cold.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or
The tyres are cold:
the valve is leaking.
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop. tyres out of direct sunlight for at least
three hours and
H Environmental note Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least than 2 km

every 14 days. Depending on the ambient temperature, the
speed at which you are driving and the load
You will find a table with the recommended on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus
tyre pressure on the tyre pressure infor- the tyre pressure change by approximately:
mation label on the driver's side B-pillar. 10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this
The tyre pressure information label may into account when checking the pressure of
also state tyre pressures for different load warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure
conditions. These are defined in the table if it is too low for the current operating
as different numbers of passengers and conditions.
amounts of luggage. The actual number of Driving with tyre pressure that is too high
seats may vary; for more information, or too low can:
please refer to the vehicle's registration Rshorten the service life of the tyres
documents.
Rcause increased tyre damage
If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre
Rhave a negative effect on handling char-
pressures stated on the tyre pressure
acteristics and thus the driving safety
information label apply for all tyres
(e.g. aquaplaning)
approved for this vehicle.
Tyre pressure 253
Tyre pressure monitor The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow

warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
General notes indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.
If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, Depending on how the warning lamp flashes
the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low
that monitor the tyre pressures in all four or a malfunction in the tyre pressure mon-
tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you itor is indicated:
if the pressure drops in one or more of the Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously,
tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only func- the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is
tions if the corresponding sensors are fit- significantly too low. The tyre pressure
ted to all wheels. monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
Important safety notes minute and then remains lit constantly,
It is the driver's responsibility to set the the tyre pressure monitor is malfunc-
tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre tioning.
pressure suitable for the operating situa- i On-board computer with colour dis-
tion (Y page 251). Note that the correct tyre play: In addition to the warning lamp, a

pressure for the current operating situa- message appears in the display.
tion must first be taught-in to the tyre Observe the information on display mes-
pressure monitor. If there is a substantial sages (Y page 184).
loss of pressure, the warning threshold for
the warning message is aligned to the ref- If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunc-
erence values taught-in. Restart the tyre tioning, it may take up to ten minutes for
pressure monitor after adjusting to the the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform
cold tyre pressure. The current pressures you of the malfunction. The malfunction
are saved as new reference values. This will be indicated first by the tyre pressure
will ensure that a warning message will warning lamp flashing for approximately
only appear if the tyre pressure drops sig- one minute and then remaining lit. When
nificantly. the fault has been rectified, the tyre pres-
sure warning lamp goes out after you have
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you
driven for a few minutes.
of an incorrectly set tyre pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tyre The operation of the tyre pressure monitor
pressure (Y page 251). can be affected by interference from radio
transmitting equipment (e.g. cordless
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to
headphones, two-way radios) that may be
warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g.
being operated in or near the vehicle.
if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign
object. In the event of a sudden loss of
pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by Tyre pressure monitor warning (on-
braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering board computer with black and white dis-
manoeuvres. play)
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres-
sure loss in one or more tyres, the yellow
warning light in the tyre pressure monitor
lights up. If the tyre pressure in one or
more tyres suddenly sinks, a warning tone
also sounds.
Z
254 Tyre pressure
Observe the instructions and safety notes wheels is correctly set for the operating
for the indicator and warning lamps in the conditions.
instrument cluster in the "Tyres" section Also observe the notes in the section on
(Y page 198). tyre pressures (Y page 251).
Tyre pressure monitor warning messages On-board computer with a monochrome dis-
(on-board computer with colour display) play
X To restart the tyre pressure monitor:
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres-
sure loss in one or more tyres, a warning press the ´ button on the multifunc-
message is shown in the display. The yellow tion lever repeatedly until the
warning light in the tyre pressure monitor ° h symbols are displayed.
lights up. For certain display messages a X Press and hold the a button on the
warning tone also sounds. multifunction lever.
The ° h symbols flash for about 5
RIf the Correct tyre pressure message
seconds. The symbols then both remain
appears in the display, the tyre pressure
lit.
in at least one tyre is too low. Correct the
tyre pressure at the next opportunity. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted.
RIf the Tyre pressure Caution tyre

On-board computer with a colour display
malfunction message appears in the X To restart the tyre pressure monitor:
display, the tyre pressure in one or more
press the 9 or : button on the
tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres
steering wheel to select the Settings
must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes wheel to confirm.
for the display messages in the "Tyres"
section (Y page 184) and the indicator and
warning lamps in the instrument cluster in the Tyre pressure monitor submenu
the "Tyres" section (Y page 198). and confirm with a.
The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor current pressures as new reference
values? message appears in the display.
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor,
all existing warning messages are deleted If you wish to confirm the restart:
and the warning lamps go out. The monitor X Press the 9 or : button to select
uses the currently set tyre pressures as the yes and press the a button to confirm.
reference values for monitoring. In most The Tyre pressure monitor restarted
cases, the tyre pressure monitor will auto- message appears in the display.
matically detect the new reference values X Press a to confirm.
after you have changed the tyre pressure.
After a short while, the message is also
However, you can also define reference val-
hidden without pressing the a but-
ues manually as described here. The tyre
ton.
pressure monitor then monitors the new
After you have driven for a few minutes,
tyre pressure values.
the system checks whether the current
X Using the tyre pressure information
tyre pressures are within the specified
label on the driver's side B-pillar, range. The new tyre pressures are then
ensure that the tyre pressure of all four accepted as reference values and moni-
tored.
Changing a wheel 255
i If the Tyre pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number

restarted message does not appear after
approximately 5 seconds, the restart was Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS
not successful. If this occurs, repeat the transmitter
restart. Type Approval Number:
If you wish to cancel the restart: TRC/LPD/2012/114
X Press the 9 or : button to select Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92
MHz.
no and press the a button to confirm.
The tyre pressure values stored at the Type Approval Number:
last restart will continue to be moni- TRC/LPD/2012/190
tored. Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4
Type Approval Number:
Radio type approval for the tyre pressure TRC/LPD/2011/158
monitor Type Number: LPD
Country Radio type approval number Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012
MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012
Argen- MW2433A

MR6706 ANRT 2011
tina H-12337
GG4 Moldova 1024
H-12338 Philip- No: ESD-1206394C
pines No: ESD-1306871C
Brazil 2770-12-8001
Model: MW2433A Serbia И 011 12
0381-13-8001
Singa- Compliance with IDA Stand-
Model: GG4 pore ard DA- 103365
Abu TRA, Registered-NO South TA-2012/719
Dhabi ER0092100/12 Africa TA-2012/1540
Dubai TRA, Registered-NO
TA-2011/1370
ER0099792/12
TRA, Registered-NO
ER0076990/11 Changing a wheel
Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10
Flat tyres
You can find information on what to do in
the event of flat tyre in the "Flat tyre" sec-
tion (Y page 229).
Interchanging the wheels

G WARNING
Never interchange the front and rear wheels
as they have different dimensions, e.g.
size, offset etc. Otherwise, there could be a
Z
256 Changing a wheel
negative effect on the road holding and you Storing wheels

could endanger yourself or others.
Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure dark place if they are not being used. Pro-
monitor, electronic components are tect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol
located in the wheel. and diesel.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied
in the area of the valve, as this could Fitting a wheel
damage the electronic components.
Only have tyres changed at a qualified Preparing the vehicle
specialist workshop. XMake sure that you have the appropriate
Various types of steel wheel can be fitted tyre-changing tools. For further infor-
on your vehicle. Some steel wheels have a mation enquire at any smart centre.
red mark in the hub cap area. The hub cap i Necessary tyre-changing tools can
has to be removed to see the red mark, see include, for example:
"Raising the vehicle" in the "Wheel
Rjack
change" section (Y page 257). When chang-
ing the wheels, always fit wheels of the Rwheel chock
same type on all axles. Rwheel wrench

Interchanging the front and rear wheels of X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery
differing dimensions can render the gen- and level ground.
eral operating permit invalid. X Apply the parking brake (Y page 139).
Always pay attention to the instructions X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
and safety notes when changing a wheel ahead position.
(Y page 255). X Depress the clutch pedal fully and engage
The wear patterns on the front and rear first or reverse gear.
tyres differ, depending on the operating X Switch off the engine.
conditions. Front tyres typically wear
more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in
the centre. X Also secure the vehicle against rolling
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and away.
the brake disc thoroughly every time a
wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre Securing the vehicle against rolling
pressure and reactivate the tyre pressure away
monitor if necessary.
Direction of rotation
Tyres with a specified direction of rota-
tion have additional benefits, e.g. if there
is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages
can only be gained if the tyres are fitted
corresponding to the direction of rota-
tion.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indi-
cates its correct direction of rotation.
X On level ground: place chocks or other Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
suitable items under the front and rear of downhill slopes.
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it
wheel you wish to change. from rolling away by applying the park-
ing brake and inserting wheel chocks.
Never disengage the parking brake while
the vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, flat load-bearing underlay must
be used. On a slippery surface, a non-
slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber
mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise,
X On light downhill gradients: place the jack will not be able to achieve its
chocks or other suitable items in front of load-bearing capacity due to the
the wheels of the front and rear axle. restricted height.

Rmake sure that the distance between the
Raising the vehicle underside of the tyres and the ground
does not exceed 3 cm.
G WARNING Rnever place your hands or feet under the
If you do not position the jack correctly at raised vehicle.
the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- Rdo not lie under the vehicle.
cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle
Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle
raised. There is a risk of injury.
is raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically,
while the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
directly under the jacking point of the
vehicle. the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Observe the following when raising the

vehicle:
Rmake sure you have a suitable jack and
wheel wrench. If the jack is used incor-
rectly, it could tip over while the vehi-
cle is raised.
For further information enquire at any
smart centre.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and
hold the vehicle for a short time while a Steel wheel with wheel trim
wheel is being changed. It is not suited
X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:
for performing maintenance work under
the vehicle. carefully reach into two of the hub cap
openings and remove the hub cap.
Z
258 Changing a wheel
identify the jacking points by the trian-

gular indentations on the sill.
To avoid damage, position the jack cen-
trally under the triangular indentations.
Steel wheel with hub cap

remove the hub cap.
X Position jack ; centrally under the tri-

angular indentations at jacking points
on the sill :.
X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts

on the wheel you wish to change by about
one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
Example
X Make sure that the base of the jack is
positioned vertically under the jacking
point.
X Raise the vehicle with jack ; until the
tyre is at most 3 cm off the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel
The vehicle may only be raised at the des- hubs could otherwise be damaged when
ignated jacking points on the sill. the bolts are tightened.
The jacking points are located just behind
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
the front wheel arches and just in front of
the rear wheel arches (arrows). You can X Remove the wheel.
Fitting a new wheel X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
finger-tight.
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged Lowering the vehicle
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could G WARNING
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk The wheels could work loose if the wheel
of accident. nuts and bolts are not tightened to the
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event specified tightening torque. There is a
of damage to the threads, contact a quali- risk of accident.
fied specialist workshop immediately. Have the tightening torque immediately
Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads checked at a qualified specialist workshop
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driv- after a wheel is changed.
ing.
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could

tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions

and safety notices in "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 255).
X Lower the vehicle until it is once again
Only use wheel bolts that are designed for
the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- standing firmly on the ground.
sons, smart recommends that you only use X Place the jack to one side.
wheel bolts which have been approved for X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
smart vehicles and the respective wheel. crosswise pattern in the sequence indi-
cated (: to ?). The tightening torque
must be 105 Nm.
XCheck the air pressure of the newly fitted
wheel and adjust accordingly.
Observe the recommended tyre pressure
(Y page 251).
i Vehicles with tyre pressure control
system: all fitted wheels must be equip-
ped with functioning sensors.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact

surfaces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
push it on.
Z
260 Wheel and tyre combinations
smart accepts no liability for damage

resulting from the use of tyres or wheels
other than those tested and approved.
Information on wheels and tyres can be
obtained at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a smart centre.
! Retreaded tyres have not been tested by
smart and the fitment of such tyres is not
recommended. Previous damage sus-
tained by the tyres (before the retread-
Steel wheel with wheel trim ing process) cannot always be recog-
X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: nised. As a result, smart cannot guaran-
fit hub cap A so that tyre valve B is not tee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are
trapped. fitted.
X Press the hub cap A evenly onto the ! Large wheels: the lower the section
wheel with both hands. width for a certain wheel size, the lower
X Check to make sure the hub cap A is the ride comfort is on poor road surfa-
seated safely on the wheel. ces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort
are reduced and the risk of damage to the
wheels and tyres as a result of driving
fit the hub cap.
over obstacles increases.
Overview of abbreviations used in the fol-
Wheel and tyre combinations lowing tyre tables:
RBA: both axles
General notes
RFA: front axle
! For safety reasons, smart recommends RRA: rear axle
that you only use tyres and wheels which You will find a table with the recommended
have been specifically approved by tyre pressures on the tyre pressure infor-
smart for your vehicle. These are spe- mation label on the driver's side B-pillar.
cially adapted to the control systems, For further information on tyre pressure,
such as ABS or ESP®. see (Y page 251). Check tyre pressures reg-
Only use tyres and wheels specifically ularly and only when the tyres are cold.
tested and approved by smart. Certain Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle the vehicle:
noise emissions or fuel consumption,
Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
may otherwise be adversely affected. In
addition, when driving with a load, (left/right)
dimensional variations and different Rwith the same type of tyres on all wheels
tyre deformation characteristics could at a given time (summer tyres, winter
cause the tyres to make contact with the tyres)
bodywork and axle components. This Exception: it is permissible to fit a dif-
could result in damage to the tyres or the ferent type or make in the event of a flat
vehicle. tyre.
i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be
fitted at the factory in all countries.
Wheel and tyre combinations 261
Tyres
smart forfour 45 kW
Summer tyres
R 15
Tyres Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5 Steel wheels:
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5 Steel wheels:
RA: 185/60 R15 84 H FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32

RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
R 16
Tyres Wheels
FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5 Light-alloy wheels:
RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5 FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44
RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40
Winter tyres
R 15
Tyres Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5 Steel wheels:
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”.
Z
262 Wheel and tyre combinations
smart forfour 52 kW
Summer tyres
R 15
Tyres Wheels
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
RA: 185/60 R15 84 H FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
R 16
Tyres Wheels
RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5 FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44
RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40
Winter tyres
R 15
Tyres Wheels
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
Wheel and tyre combinations 263
smart forfour 66 kW Turbo

Summer tyres
R 15
Tyres Wheels
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
RA: 185/60 R15 84 H FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:

FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
R 16
Tyres Wheels
RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5 FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44
RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40
Winter tyres
R 15
Tyres Wheels
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
Z
264
265

Information on technical data ............ 266
Vehicle electronics ......................... 266
Identification plates ....................... 267
Service products and capacities ......... 268
Vehicle data ................................... 273
>> Technical data.

266 Vehicle electronics
Useful information Retrofitting two-way radios and

mobile phones (RF transmitters)
els, series and optional equipment for G WARNING
your vehicle that were available at the If RF transmitters are tampered with or not
time of going to press. Country-specific properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic
differences are possible. Note that your radiation they emit can interfere with the
vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise
tures described. This is also the case for the operational safety of the vehicle. There
systems and functions relevant to safety. is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a
G WARNING
Information on technical data
If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly
General notes in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radia-
tion could interfere with the vehicle elec-
You can find current technical data on the
tronics, e.g.:
Internet on our smart homepage.
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to
i The technical data was determined in an exterior aerial
>> Technical data.
accordance with EC Directives. All data

Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted
applies to the vehicle's standard equip-
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection
ment. The data may therefore differ for
type
vehicles with optional equipment. For
further information enquire at any smart This could jeopardise the operating safety
centre. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
Vehicle electronics fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in the
Tampering with the engine electronics vehicle, always connect them to the low-
! Only have work carried out on the reflection exterior aerial.
engine electronics and its associated
parts, such as control units, sensors, ! The operating permit may be invalida-
actuating components and connector ted if the instructions for installation
leads, at a qualified specialist work- and use of RF transmitters are not
shop. Vehicle components may otherwise observed.
wear more quickly and the vehicle's In particular, the following conditions
operating permit may be invalidated. must be complied with:
Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
Robserve the maximum permissible out-
put in these wavebands.
Ronly approved aerial positions may be
used.
Identification plates 267
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radi- The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at

ation may cause damage to your health and the base of the aerial must not exceed the
to the health of others. The use of an exte- following values:
rior aerial takes into consideration the
scientific discussion surrounding the Waveband Maximum
possible health risk posed by electromag- transmission
netic fields. output
The following aerial positions may be used Tetra 20 W
if RF transmitters have been properly 380 - 410 MHz
installed:
Mobile communica- 6W
tions generation
2G/3G/4G
The following can be used in the vehicle

without restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum trans-
mission output of up to 100 mW
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning

the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for
>> Technical data.

Approved aerial positions
: Front roof area the following wavebands:
; Rear roof area RTetra
RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G)
i On vehicles with a folding top, fitting
an aerial to the front roof area is not
permitted.
Identification plates
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fit- Vehicle identification plate with
ting aftermarket radio frequency trans- vehicle identification number (VIN)
mitting equipment") when retrofitting RF
(radio frequency) transmitters. Comply
with the legal requirements for add-on
parts.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply or
aerial connections intended for use with
the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the
manufacturer's additional instructions
when installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands,
maximum transmission outputs or aerial X Open the front right-hand door.
positions must be approved by Mercedes- You will see vehicle identification
Benz. plate :.
Z
268 Service products and capacities
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its

rearmost position.
X Fold up floor covering : in front of the
right-hand front seat.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 267).
Engine number
Example: vehicle identification plate The engine number is stamped onto the
: Vehicle identification plate crankcase. You can obtain further infor-
; Vehicle manufacturer mation from any qualified specialist
= EU type approval number workshop.
? Vehicle identification number (VIN)
A Maximum permissible gross vehicle
Service products and capacities
weight
B Permissible gross vehicle weight of the Important safety notes
vehicle combination
C Maximum permissible front axle load
G WARNING
>> Technical data.
Service product can be poisonous and haz-

D Maximum permissible rear axle load
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
E Paint code
Observe the instructions on the respective
i The data shown on the vehicle identi- original container when using, storing and
fication plate is example data. This data disposing off service products. Always
is different for every vehicle and can store service products in the sealed orig-
deviate from the data shown here. You can inal container. Always keep service prod-
find the data applicable to your vehicle ucts out of the reach of children.
on the vehicle's identification plate.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
Vehicle identification number (VIN) mentally-responsible manner.
Service products include the following:

RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmis-
sion oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
RWindscreen washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be

matched. smart recommends that you use
products tested and approved by smart.
Service products and capacities 269
They are listed in this smart Owner's Man- RIffuel is swallowed, seek immediate
ual in the appropriate section. medical attention. Do not induce vomit-
You can identify service products approved ing.
by Mercedes-Benz by the following RChange any clothing that has come into
inscriptions on the container: contact with fuel immediately.
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Tank capacity
Other designations or recommendations The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
indicate a level of quality or a specifica- depending on the vehicle equipment.
tion in accordance with an MB Sheet Number
(e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily Model Total capa-
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. city
i For further information enquire at any All models 28.0 l
smart centre. or
34.0 l
Fuel
Model Of which
reserve fuel
G WARNING All models Approx.
>> Technical data.

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel 5.0 l
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Petrol
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Fuel grade
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
before refuelling. with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with
G WARNING the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to enter the fuel system. Even small amounts
health. There is a danger of injury. of the wrong fuel can result in damage to
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into con- the fuel system and the engine. Notify a
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not qualified specialist workshop and have
inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-
reach of children. pletely.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Only refuel using premium-grade
observe the following: unleaded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/
RWash the fuel off any affected areas of 85 MOZ, that conforms to European stand-
skin with water and soap immediately. ard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equiv-
RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them alent specification.
thoroughly with clean water immedi- Fuel of this specification can contain up
ately. Seek immediate medical atten- to 10 % ethanol.
tion. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or
E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear
Z
and damage the engine and exhaust sys- This fuel can temporarily produce
tem. unpleasant odours, especially on short
journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel
! Only use the fuel recommended. Oper-
(sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for
ating the vehicle with other fuels can
refuelling, the odours are reduced.
lead to engine failure.
Information on refuelling (Y page 136).
! Do not use the following:
RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) Additives
RE100 (100% ethanol) ! Operation of the engine with fuel addi-
RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol)
tives added later can cause engine dam-
age. Therefore, do not mix any fuel addi-
RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol)
tives with the fuel. This does not include
RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) additives for the removal and prevention
RM100 (100% methanol) of residue build-up. Petrol must only be
Rpetrol with additives containing mixed with additives recommended by
metal smart. Observe the instructions for use
RDiesel in the product description. For further
information on recommended additives
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec-
enquire at any smart centre.
ommended for your vehicle. Do not use
additives. Engine failure may otherwise smart recommends that you use fuel brands
occur. This does not include cleaning that have additives.
>> Technical data.
additives for the removal and prevention The quality of the fuel available in some
of residue build-up. Petrol must only be countries may not be sufficient. Residue
mixed with cleaning additives recom- could build up in the injection system as a
mended by smart, see "Additives". For result. In this case, in consultation with a
further information enquire at any smart smart centre, the petrol may be mixed with
centre. the cleaning additive recommended by
Usually you will find information about the smart. You must observe the notes and mix-
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find ing ratios specified on the container.
the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling
station staff. Fuel consumption information
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. H Environmental note
Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci-
fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using entists believe to be principally respon-
E10 fuel. sible for global warming (the greenhouse
As a temporary measure, if the recommen- effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are
ded fuel is not available, you may also use directly related to fuel consumption and
unleaded petrol with an octane rating of therefore depend on:
91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce engine Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
performance and increase fuel consump- Rdriving style
tion. Avoid driving at full throttle and Rother non-technical factors, such as
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using
environmental influences, road condi-
fuel with a lower RON/MON.
tions or traffic flow
i In some countries, the available petrol
may not be sufficiently low in sulphur.
Service products and capacities 271
You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis- Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on
sions by driving carefully and having it the oil container by the inscription "MB
serviced regularly. Approval" and the corresponding designa-
tion, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in You can call up an overview of approved
the following situations: engine oils on the Internet at
Rat very low outside temperatures http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter-
Rin
ing the designation, e.g. 229.5.
urban traffic
Ron short journeys
The table shows which engine oils have
been approved for your vehicle.
Rin mountainous terrain
Petrol engines: in certain countries, dif-
i Only for certain countries: you can find ferent engine oils can be used, provided
the current consumption and emission that the maintenance intervals are
values of your vehicle in the COC docu- reduced. For more information, please
ments (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). contact a qualified specialist workshop.
These documents are delivered with your
vehicle. Model MB Approval
The consumption figures were in each All models 229.5
case based on the currently applicable
version:
i If the engine oils listed in the table
Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed
>> Technical data.

are not available, you may add the fol-
the EURO 5 standard, in accordance lowing engine oils until the next oil
with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 change:
Deviations from these values may occur RMB Approval 229.1 and 229.3 or ACEA A3
under normal operating conditions.
This must only be added once and the
amount must not be greater than 1.0 l.
Engine oil
Capacities
General notes
The following values refer to an oil change
When handling engine oil, observe the including the oil filter.
important safety notes on service products Missing values were not available at the
(Y page 268). time of going to print.
The quality of the engine oil is decisive
for the function and service life of an Model Replacement
engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes- amount
Benz approves engine oils that correspond
All models 3.4 l
to the current technical standard. There-
fore, only use engine oils approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Additives
Further information on tested and ! Do not use any additives with the engine
approved engine oils can be obtained from oil. This could damage the engine.
any smart centre. smart recommends that
you have the oil change carried out at a
Z
Engine oil viscosity the replacement confirmed in the Ser-

vice Booklet.
Coolant
General notes
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifica-
Viscosity describes the flow characteris- tions for Service Products, MB Specifi-
tics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high cations for Service Products 310.1, e.g.
viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower on the Internet at
the viscosity, the faster it flows. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
Engine oil selection is based on the tact a qualified specialist workshop.
respective outside temperatures and in ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
accordance with the SAE classification even in countries where high tempera-
(viscosity). The table shows you which SAE tures prevail.
classifications are to be used. The low- Otherwise, the engine cooling system is
>> Technical data.
temperature properties of engine oils can not sufficiently protected from corro-
be significantly impaired during opera- sion and overheating.
tion due to, for example, ageing or soot and
fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
recommended to observe regular oil qualified specialist workshop and the
changes using an approved engine oil with replacement confirmed in the Service
the appropriate SAE classification. Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precau-
tions for service products when handling
Brake fluid coolant (Y page 268).
When handling brake fluid, observe the The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
important safety notes on service products freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
(Y page 268). the following tasks:
The brake fluid change intervals can be Rcorrosion protection
found in the Service Booklet. Rantifreeze protection
Only use brake fluid approved by Rraising the boiling point
Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is pres-
331.0.
ent in the correct concentration, the boil-
Information about approved brake fluid ing point of the coolant during operation
can be obtained at any qualified special- will be approximately 130 †.
ist workshop or on the Internet at:
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced
at a qualified specialist workshop and
Vehicle data 273
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con- The correct mixing ratio can be taken
centration in the engine cooling system from the information on the antifreeze
should: protection container.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB
engine cooling system against freezing SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
down to approximately -37 †. fluid all year round.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be
dissipated as effectively. Vehicle data
smart recommends an antifreeze/corrosion
General notes
inhibitor concentrate in accordance with
MB Specifications for Service Products Please note that for the specified vehicle
310.1. data:
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it Rthe heights specified may vary as a
is filled with a coolant mixture that result of:
ensures adequate antifreeze and corro- - tyres
sion protection. - load
i The coolant is checked at every main- - condition of the suspension

tenance interval at a qualified special- - optional equipment
ist workshop. Roptional equipment reduces the maxi-
>> Technical data.

mum payload.
Rvehicle-specific weight information
Windscreen washer system
can be found on the vehicle identifica-
General notes tion plate (Y page 267).
Ronly for certain countries: you can find
! Do not use distilled or de-ionised vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC
water in the washer fluid reservoir. Oth- documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CON-
erwise, the level sensor may be damaged. FORMITY). These documents are deliv-
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and ered with your vehicle.
WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the You can find the correct values for your
spraying nozzles could become blocked. model with the help of the VIN on the vehi-
When handling washer fluid, observe the cle identification plate (Y page 267).
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 268).
At temperatures above freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a
mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a
mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g.
MB WinterFit.
Z
274 Vehicle data
Dimensions and weights
Model :
Opening
height
All models 2012 mm
All models
Vehicle length 3495 mm
>> Technical data.
Vehicle width 1875 mm

including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle width 1665 mm
excluding exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 1554 mm
Wheelbase 2494 mm
Maximum boot load 75 kg
275
276
Publication details
Internet
Further information about smart vehicles

and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.smart.com
http://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this
Owner's Manual to the technical documen-
tation team at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, transla-
ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in

part, without written permission from
Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
As at 29.10.2014
www.smart.com
999105101R
JW É999105101RyËÍ
Order no. 6522 0127 02
Part no. 453 584 99 02
smart - A Daimler brand

4535849902 Edition NA2014-11c
É4535849902*ËÍ

Ba Smart FF 453.0 DCT Ece 02-15 en GB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ba Smart FF 453.0 DCT Ece 02-15 en GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

>> Owner's Manual

! Notes on material damage alert you to

The equipment in your vehicle may there-

Keep printed copies of the documents in

Index ............................................ 4 At a glance ................................... 25

Introduction ................................. 18 Safety .......................................... 37

Opening and closing ....................... 67

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ..... 83

Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 91

Climate control ............................ 107

Driving and parking ...................... 119

On-board computer and displays ...... 153

Stowing and features ..................... 203

Maintenance and care .................... 213

Breakdown assistance .................... 227

Wheels and tyres ........................... 247

Technical data ............................. 265

1, 2, 3 ... Priming/deactivating function .... 60

Malfunction (on-board computer Brake lamps

Seat cover .............................. 224 Heating .................................. 109

Filling capacity ...................... 271 Flat tyre

Problem (malfunction) ............... 138 Ignition lock

Starting the engine .................. 122 Deactivating ........................... 148

Starting the engine .................. 122 Operating instructions

Protection against theft Rear window wiper

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Service message ....................... 218

Replacing the bulb .................... 99 U

Daimler's declared policy is one of com- fic.

The objective is to use the natural resour- sumption.

Rinstrument cluster Always specify the vehicle identification

G WARNING If the underbody panelling is damaged,

G WARNING Rrepair work

Implied warranty These include, for example:

Revents Rquality assurance

Rfaults The readout is handled by service network

During vehicle operation, certain situa-

Function Page Function Page

Instrument cluster with monochrome display

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Instrument cluster with colour display

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

iter switch: cluster with colour dis-

i Voice-operated control as well as con-

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel

Useful information ............................ 38

Useful information An airbag supplements a correctly worn

time of going to press. Country-specific

Important safety notes

crushed between the vehicle occupant

Seat belts are only intended to secure and

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts

Releasing the seat belts

With the status indicator for the rear-com-

instrument cluster is a reminder that all approximately 20 km/h

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- Front airbags

Head/thorax airbags protective function. This poses an

replaced at a qualified specialist work-